Mech Syllabus

1020233110 L T P C
MANUFACTURING PROCESS
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Introduction
Generally, a manufacturing process involves products to be manufactured from raw materials.
In order to achieve the objectives, certain processes consisting of many operations and steps
need to be executed. The manufacturing process begins with the creation of the materials from
which the design is made. These materials are then modified through the manufacturing
process to become the required part. This will provide the students an opportunity to skill
themselves in various manufacturing techniques available in the industry and also how to select
the materials for engineering applications.
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable the student,
● To classify the different types of pattern materials, Moulding, Casting
● To explain the different types of welding process
● To study the various types of Hot Working and Press Working process
● To learn the various manufacturing metal by powder metallurgy and Heat Treatment
process
● To study various types of Work and tool holding devices and power tools applications.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Discuss the various casting techniques used in foundry.
CO2: Identify appropriate joining techniques and defects in weld components.
CO3: Illustrate various forging and press working processes.
CO4: Classify different powder metallurgy and heat treatment processes.
CO5: Describe various work holding, tool holding and power tools used in shop floor.
Pre-requisites
Nil
DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

REGULATION 2023
DME 1
1020233110 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO / PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7
CO1 3 1
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 2
Legend: 3-High Correlation, 2-Medium Correlation, 1-Low Correlation
Instructional Strategy
● It is advised that teachers take steps to pique pupils' attention and boost their curiosity
to learn.
● Implement task-based learning activities where students work on specific tasks or
projects.
● Incorporate technology tools and resources, such as online platforms, interactive
multimedia, and virtual communication tools, to enhance engagement and provide
additional practice opportunities.
● Incorporate formative and summative assessments to gauge student progress and
provide targeted feedback.
● Throughout the course, a demonstrate-practice-activity strategy may be used to ensure
that learning is outcome and employability based.
● All demonstrations/Hand-on practices may be followed in the real environment as far as
possible.

REGULATION 2023
DME 2
1020233110 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Assessment Methodology
Continuous Assessment (40 marks) End Semester

Examination
CA1 CA2 CA3 CA4 (60 marks)
Quiz
Written test
Written test MCQ Model Written
Mode (Another Two
(Two units) (Online / Examination Examination
units)
Offline)
Duration 2 Periods 2 Periods 1 Hour 3 Hours 3 Hours
Exam Marks 50 50 60 100 100
Converted to 15 15 5 20 60
Marks 15 5 20 60
Tentative
6th Week 12th Week 13-14th Week 16th Week
Schedule
CA1 and CA2: Assessment written test should be conducted for 50 Marks for two units. The
marks scored will be converted to 15 Marks. Best of one will be considered for the internal
assessment of 15 Marks.
CA1and CA2, Assessment test should be conducted for two units as below.
Answer five questions (5 X 10 Marks = 50 Marks).
Eight questions will be asked, students should write Five questions. Each unit Four questions
can be asked. Each question may have subdivisions. Maximum two subdivisions shall be
permitted.
CA3: 60 MCQ can be asked by covering the entire portion. It may be conducted by Online /
Offline. The answer scripts of every student (online / offline) for this assessment should be kept

REGULATION 2023
DME 3
1020233110 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
for records and future verification. The marks scored should be converted to 5 marks for the
internal assessment.
CA4: Model examination should be conducted as per the end semester question pattern. The
marks should be converted to 20 marks for the internal assessment.
Question Pattern:
Answer Ten questions by selecting two questions from each unit. Each question carries 10
marks each.
Four questions will be asked from every unit, students should write any two questions. The
question may have two subdivisions only.
Syllabus Contents
Unit I FOUNDRY TECHNOLOGY
Chapter 1.1: Foundry: Pattern – Pattern Materials – types – single piece (solid) and 9
split type only – allowances – moulding – moulding tools and
boxes – moulding sands – classifications and properties-core - CO2core making.
Melting of cast iron - cupola furnace - Melting of nonferrous metals - crucible
furnace melting of steel – Electric arc furnaces.
Chapter 1.2: Casting: Definition - sand casting using green sand and dry sand -
gravity die casting - pressure die casting - hot and cold chamber processes -
centrifugal casting - continuous casting– defects in casting - causes and remedies
-cleaning of casting and safety practices in foundry
Unit II WELDING TECHNOLOGY
Chapter 2.1: Arc Welding and Gas welding: - Arc welding definition – arc welding 9
equipment – arc welding methods – Carbon arc, metal arc, metal inert gas (MIG),
tungsten inert gas (TIG).

REGULATION 2023
DME 4
1020233110 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Gas Welding: Definition - Gas Welding Equipment - Oxy and acetylene welding -
Three types of flame.
Chapter 2.2: Resistance welding and welding related processes: Resistance welding
– definition – classification of resistance welding – butt – spot –seam -projection
welding - welding related processes - oxy and acetylene cutting - arc cutting - hard
facing - bronze welding - soldering and brazing.
Destructive and nondestructive types of tests - magnetic particle test – Die
Penetrant test - radiographic and ultrasonic test - defects in welding - causes and
remedies - safety practices in welding.
Unit III FORGING AND PRESS WORKING
FORGING AND PRESS WORKING 9

Chapter 3.1: Forging: Hot working, advantages of hot working – hot working
operations – rolling – forging – hammer or smith forging, drop forging, upset
forging, press forging – roll forging
Chapter 3.2: Press Working: Types of presses – mechanical and hydraulic presses –
press tools and accessories – press working operations– bending operations –
angle bending – channel bending – curling –drawing – shearing operations –
blanking – piercing – trimming – notching –lancing – shaving – parting off
Unit IV POWDER METALLURGY AND HEAT TREATMENT
Chapter 4.1: Powder Metallurgy: Methods of manufacturing metal powders – 9

atomization, reduction and electrolysis deposition – compacting –sintering – sizing
– infiltration – mechanical properties of parts made by powder metallurgy – design
rule for the powder metallurgy process.

REGULATION 2023
DME 5
1020233110 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Chapter 4.2: Heat Treatment: Purpose – procedures – applications of various heat

treatment process – Iron carbon equilibrium diagram Annealing – Normalizing –
hardening – tempering –quenching medium – different types of quenching medium.
UNIT V WORK HOLDING, TOOL HOLDING DEVICES AND POWER TOOLS
Chapter 5.1: Work Holding Devices: Chucks - Centres - Steady Rest - Follower rest - 9
Face Plate - Catch Plate - Drive plate - carrier - Mandrel - Machine Vice - V block - T
Bolts and Clamp - Angle plate - Indexing head - Description and uses.
Tool Holding Devices: Four way tool post - Turret indexing - Arbors - Adapter - Drill
chuck - Sleeve - Socket - collet. Description and uses.
Chapter 5.2: Power Tools: Classification - Hand drill- Hammer Drills- Angle Grinder -
impact wrench - Circular saw - Chain saw - Jigsaw - Power/impact screwdrivers -
Electrical Screwdrivers. Cutters: Craftsman cutter - Reciprocating cutter.
TOTAL HOURS 45
Assessment Test and Revision with Student activity 15*

* Common Test and Revision periods can be used. 1 Period per week can be used for this
subject.
Suggested list of Students Activity,

1. Prepare the green sand mould for the solid and split patterns.
2. Practice the basic welding operations.
3. Practice the bending and shearing operations in the press.
4. Prepare a list of work holding devices and tool holding devices used in the workshop.

REGULATION 2023
DME 6
1020233110 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Reference Books:
1. Elements of workshop Technology Volume I & II – Hajra Chowdry & Bhattacharaya - IIth
Edition - Media Promoters & Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,
2. A Textbook of workshop Technology - R.S.Khurmi & J.K.Gupta - 2nd Edition, S.Chand &
Co., Ram Nagar, New Delhi – 2018.
3. Manufacturing process – Begeman - 5th Edition -McGraw Hill, New Delhi 2011.
4. Workshop Technology- WAJ Chapman - Volume I, II, & III – Vima Books Pvt. Ltd., 4262/3,
Ansari Road, Daryaganj, New Delhi 110 002.
5. Production Technology – HMT- Edn. 18 - published by Tata McGraw Hill publishing Co.
Ltd., 7 West Patel nagar, New Delhi 110 008. – 20181.
Web Reference
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0iezQ4IeXsc – Metal Casting
2. https://youtu.be/8RUXvdsgsyg - Sand Properties
3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dMcP3aCHyTQ&t=6s –Welding Tech
4. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EJ94XC0YfZc&t=801s- Metal Forming
5. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AZMbSBVVWhI- Powder metallurgy
6. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=748_ME0p0Ag- Heat Treatment process

REGULATION 2023
DME 7
1020233110 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
END SEMESTER QUESTION PATTERN - Theory Exam
Duration: 3 Hrs. Max. Marks: 100

Note: Answer Ten questions by selecting two questions from each unit. Each question
carries 10 marks each.
Instruction to the Question Setters

Four questions will be asked from every unit, students should write any two questions
for 10 marks. The question may have two subdivisions only.

REGULATION 2023
DME 8
1020233230 L T P C
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
PRACTICUM 3 0 2 4
Introduction:
Strength of materials is a key subject in mechanical engineering that focuses on how solid
objects behave when they are put under various forces and pressures. It’s vital it helps us
understand and predict if a material can handle certain loads without breaking. Strength of
materials is the discipline related to calculation of stresses and strains in structures and
mechanical components. It helps engineers make informed decisions about material selection,
decision and construction.
Course Objectives:
Acquire knowledge about selection of materials
Towards developing the theoretical basics about the stress, strain and elastic modulus
concepts in various components.
Understand the mechanical behavior of materials.
To solve practical problems related to shafts and springs.
Estimate the stresses induced in thin cylinders.
Understand the basics of engineering materials and their role in the development of societies
and industries.
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Discuss various engineering materials and their mechanical properties
CO2: Compute the effects various loads on materials
CO3: Analyse the shaft using the principles of pure torsion
CO4: Analyse the springs in various load conditions
CO5: Determine the various dimensions of thin cylinders under various load conditions
Pre-requisites:
Knowledge of basic mathematics and Science

REGULATION 2023
DME 9
1020233230 L T P C
PRACTICUM 3 0 2 4
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 2 3 3
CO2 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3
CO5 3 1 3 2
Instructional Strategy:
The instructional strategy for teaching strength of materials in polytechnic colleges emphasizes
practical application and industry relevance.
Through a curriculum aligned with the state technical education board, the syllabus is broken
down into manageable units, prioritizing topics pertinent to Indian engineering contexts.
Visual aids, bilingual explanations, and hands-on demonstrations are utilized to accommodate
linguistic diversity and enhance understanding.
Incorporating industry examples and field visit to construction sites and manufacturing facilities
fosters experiential learning.
Assessment methods include practical assessment, written exams, and peer learning initiatives,
complemented by career guidance to inform students about opportunities in mechanical
engineering.
Continuous feedback mechanisms ensure the refinement and effectiveness of the instructional
approach.

REGULATION 2023
DME 10
1020233230 L T P C
PRACTICUM 3 0 2 4
Assessment Methodology:
Continuous Assessment (40 marks) End
Semester
CA1 CA2 CA3 CA4 Examination
(60 marks)
Written
Written Test Written Test Written Test
Examination
Theory Theory Practical Test (Complete
Mode (Complete
(Any Two (Another Two (All Exercises) Theory
Theory
Units) Units) Portions)
Portions)
Duration 2 Periods 2 Periods 3 Hours 3 Hours 3 Hours
Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
6th Week 12th Week 15th Week 16th Week
Schedule
Note:
● CA1 and CA2: Assessment written test should be conducted for 50 Marks. The marks
scored will be converted to 10 Marks for each test. Best of one will be considered for the
internal assessment of 10 Marks.
CA1 and CA2, Assessment written test should be conducted for two units as below.
Answer any Five questions. (5 X 10 Marks = 50 Marks).
Eight questions will be asked, students should write Five questions.
Each unit Four questions can be asked. Each question may have subdivisions. Maximum
two subdivisions shall be permitted.
● CA 3: All the exercises/experiments should be completed and kept for the practical test.
The students shall be permitted to select any one experiment by lot for the test. The
practical test should be conducted as per the scheme of evaluation as below. The
marks awarded for 100 marks will be converted to 15 Marks for the internal mark.

REGULATION 2023
DME 11
1020233230 L T P C
PRACTICUM 3 0 2 4
Practical documents should be maintained for every exercise / experiment immediately

after completion of the practice. The practical document should be submitted for the
practical test. Each exercise/experiment should be evaluated for 10 Marks. The total
marks awarded should be converted to 30 Marks for the practical test as per the scheme
of evaluation as below.
The details of the practical documents to be prepared as per the instruction below.
Each exercise observation and calculations should be completed on the day of practice.
The same shall be evaluated for 10 marks on the day or next day of practice before
commencement of the next exercise.
This documentation can be carried out in a separate notebook or printed manual or file.
The reading and calculations and graph should be written by the student manually. The
evaluated practical document should be submitted for the Practical Test (CA3). The
mark scored by the students should be converted to 30 marks. The same should be
included as per the allocation in the practical test.
The detailed date of the practices and its evaluations should be maintained in the course
logbook. The log book and the practical documents should be submitted for the
verification by the Flying Squad and DOTE Official.
SCHEME OF EVALUATION - Practical Test

Sl.No. Description Marks
A Aim / Apparatus required 10
B Procedure / Observation 20
C Formula / Calculation 20
D Result / Graph 10
E Practical document (All Practicals) 30
F Viva Voce 10
Total 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 12
1020233230 L T P C
PRACTICUM 3 0 2 4
CA4: Model examination should be conducted for complete theory portions as per the end
semester question pattern. The marks awarded should be converted to 15 marks for the internal
assessment.
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents
Unit I SELECTION OF MATERIALS

Theory: 9
Engineering materials:
Introduction to engineering materials- Ferrous and Non Ferrous materials - material
selection-factors affecting the selection of materials-procedure for materials
selection.
Advanced materials - smart materials and nanomaterials-classification of
nanomaterials – applications.
Hardness test:
Brinell hardness test, Rockwell hardness test, Vickers Hardness test – Shore
Hardness Test ( Durometer) - Knowledge on Micro Hardness test
Practical: 3
EXPERIMENT : 1.
Hardness Test: Determination of Rockwell hardness number for various materials
like mild steel, high carbon steel, brass, copper, aluminium and Plastics (Any Two
Materials).

REGULATION 2023
DME 13
1020233230 L T P C
PRACTICUM 3 0 2 4
Unit II DEFORMATION OF METALS

Theory: 9
Simple stresses and strains: Definition - load, stress and strain - classification of
force systems - tensile, compressive and shear force systems– Definition - Hooke’s
law -Young’s modulus - working stress, factor of safety, load factor, shear stress and
shear strain - modulus of rigidity - deformation due to tension and compressive
forces - simple problems in tension, compression and shear force.
Mechanical testing of materials: Tensile test of mild steel in UTM - stress strain
diagram - limit of proportionality - elastic limit -yield stress - breaking stress -
ultimate stress - percentage of an elongation and percentage reduction in area ( no
problems)- fatigue test - creep test.
Practical: 4
EXPERIMENT : 2.
Tensile Test on materials : Determine young’s modulus of elasticity, yield stress,
ultimate stress, breaking stress, percentage of elongation and percentage of
reduction in area of a given specimen ( Mild steel, Cast Iron , Aluminium, Brass)
(Any one material) and plot stress strain diagram.
Unit III ELASTIC CONSTANTS AND STRAIN ENERGY
Theory: 9
Elastic constants: Definition - lateral strain – poison’s ratio - volumetric strain - bulk
modulus - volumetric strain of rectangular and circular bars (No derivation) -
problems connecting linear, lateral and volumetric deformation – Simple problems
on elastic constants.
Strain energy: Definition - proof resilience - modulus of resilience - the expression
for strain energy stored in a bar due to axial load - instantaneous stresses due to
sudden and impact loads (No derivation) - problems computing instantaneous
stress and deformation in sudden and impact loadings.

REGULATION 2023
DME 14
1020233230 L T P C
PRACTICUM 3 0 2 4
Practical: 3
EXPERIMENT : 3.
Impact test : Find the impact strength of the given specimen ( Mild steel, Cast Iron,
Aluminium and Brass) (Any Two materials) using izod test and Charpy test.
Unit IV THEORY OF TORSION
Theory: 9
Torsion: Theory of torsion - assumptions - torsion equation

(no derivation)- strength of solid and hollow shafts - power transmitted - definition -
polar modulus – sectional modulus - torsional rigidity - strength and stiffness of
shafts - comparison of hollow and solid shafts in weight and strength
considerations - advantages of hollow shafts over solid shafts – shear stress
distribution - problems.
Material testing: Torsion testing machine (Description only).
Practical: 4
EXPERIMENT : 4.
Torsion test: Determine the shear stress and modulus of rigidity of the given
specimen ( Mild steel, Cast Iron, Aluminium and Brass) (Any two materials) using a
Torsion testing machine.
Unit V SPRINGS AND THIN CYLINDERS
Theory: 9
Springs: Types of springs - laminated and coiled spring - applications - types of
coiled springs - difference between open and closely coiled helical springs - closely
coiled helical spring subjected to an axial load (no derivation) - problems to
determine shear stress, deflection, stiffness and resilience of closed coil helical
springs.

REGULATION 2023
DME 15
1020233230 L T P C
PRACTICUM 3 0 2 4
Thin cylinders: Definition - thin cylindrical shell - failure of thin cylindrical shell
subjected to internal pressure - hoop and longitudinal stresses causes in thin
cylindrical shell subjected to internal pressure (no derivation) - simple problems -
change in dimensions of a thin cylindrical shell subjected to internal pressure -
problems
Practical: 6
EXPERIMENT : 5.
Test on springs of circular section: Determine the modulus of rigidity and strain
energy, and stiffness of the open coiled helical springs.
EXPERIMENT : 6.
Determine the modulus of rigidity and strain energy, and stiffness of the closed
coiled helical springs.
Revision + Test + Students Activity 10

TOTAL HOURS 75
Suggested List of Students Activity:

Other than the classroom learning , the following are the suggested student related co-curricular
activities which can be undertaken to accelerate the attainment of the various outcomes in this
course.
⮚ Conduct a survey, specific to properties of various types of materials used in mechanical
engineering and prepare a report.
⮚ Compare the strength of the solid shaft with that of hollow shaft for the same power
transmission for an automobile and make a report.
⮚ Students can be given practices in the Virtual Labs | Mechanical Engineering (vlab.co.in).
This can be given to a team of students and make them prepare a report.

REGULATION 2023
DME 16
1020233230 L T P C
PRACTICUM 3 0 2 4
Sample Experiments: Four bar mechanism, Slider crank mechanism, Elliptical Trammel,
Cam Mechanism, Linkage Model, Crank and Slotted Mechanism, Whitworth Mechanism,
Straight Line Mechanism, Universal Joint etc…
Text and Reference books:

1. Dr. P.Purushothama Raj, V. Ramasamy, Strength of Materials, Pearson Edition 2013.
2. Dr. R K Bansal, strength of materials, 5th edition , laxmi publications private limited,2013.
3. R S Khurmi , strength of materials, edition 2019 , s chand publications, 2019.
4. B K Sarkar, strength of materials, 10th edition, tata mcgraw hill education private limited,
2012.
5. R K Rajput, materials science and engineering, 5th edition, S K Kataria and sons
publications, 2024
Web reference:
● https://youtu.be/GkFgysZC4Vc?si=j-q-9UMmeDg64YNB
● https://youtu.be/uA_HqCGo8Pg?si=q03sPw7010ot0BdT
● https://youtu.be/WERoSRcnafA?si=b7Xv3RI1s8LvSUhw
Equipment / Facilities required to conduct the Practical Portions.

1. Universal testing machine. 01
2. Rockwell’s hardness testing machine. 01
3. Impact testing machine. 01
4. Torsion testing machine. 01
5. Spring testing machine 01
Required instruments and consumables.

REGULATION 2023
DME 17
1020233230 L T P C
PRACTICUM 3 0 2 4



REGULATION 2023
DME 18
1020233320 L T P C
WORKSHOP PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2
Introduction:
Diploma technocrats frequently encounter diverse manufacturing processes. This course
workshop practice aims to enhance student's comprehension of manufacturing methods, like
Welding, Soldering, Brazing and use of Power tools.
Course Objectives:
● To identify the tools and equipment used in workshop practice.
● Perform welding operations to make different types of joints.
● Identify the different welding defects.
● Practical skills on Soldering, Brazing and power tools.
● Prepare a record of work for all the exercises.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Recall the safety procedure followed on the shop floor.
CO2: Demonstrate skills in all types of welding.
CO3: Acquire skills on soldering.
CO4: Acquire skills on Brazing.
CO5: Demonstrate skills on the use of Power tools.
Pre-requisites:
Basic Workshop Practices and Basic Engineering Practices.

REGULATION 2023
DME 19
1020233320 L T P C
WORKSHOP PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 2 3 1
CO2 2 3 1
CO3 2 3
CO4 2 3
CO5 2 3
● Engage and Motivate: Instructors should actively engage students to boost their learning
confidence.
● Real-World Relevance: Incorporate relatable, real-life examples and engineering
applications to help students understand and appreciate course concepts.
● Interactive Learning: Utilize demonstrations and plan interactive student activities for an
engaging learning experience.
● Application-Based Learning: Employ a theory-demonstrate-practice-activity strategy
throughout the course to ensure outcome-driven learning and employability.
● Simulation and Real-World Practice: Conduct demonstrations and hands-on activities in
a simulated environment, transitioning to real-world scenarios when possible.
● Encourage Critical Analysis: Foster an environment where students can honestly assess
experiment outcomes and analyze potential sources of error in case of discrepancies

REGULATION 2023
DME 20
1020233320 L T P C
WORKSHOP PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2

Examination
CA1 CA2 CA3 CA4
(60 marks)
Practical Practical
Mode Practical Test Practical Test Practical Test
Document Examination
Portion First Cycle Second Cycle All Exercises All Exercises All Exercises
Duration 2 Periods 2 Periods Regularly 3 Hours 3 Hours
Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100
Marks 10 10 20 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
● CA1 and CA2: All the exercises/experiments as per the portions mentioned above
should be completed and kept for the practical test. The students shall be permitted to
select any one by lot for the test. The practical test should be conducted as per the
scheme of evaluation as below. The marks awarded will be converted to 10 Marks for
each assessment test. Best of one will be considered for the internal assessment of 10
Marks.
Cycle I: 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
Cycle II: 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10.

REGULATION 2023
DME 21
1020233320 L T P C
WORKSHOP PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
PART DESCRIPTION MARKS

A Aim & Tools required 10
B Preparation 20
C Welding / Cutting/ Joining 20
TOTAL 50
● CA 3: Practical document should be maintained for every exercise immediately after

completion of the practice. The same should be evaluated for 10 Marks. The total marks
awarded should be converted to 10 Marks for the internal assessment. The practical
document should be submitted for the Practical Test and End Semester Examination
with a bonafide certificate
The details of the documents to be prepared as per the instruction below.
Each exercise should be completed on the day of practice. The same shall be evaluated
for 10 marks on the day or next day of practice before commencement of the next
exercise.
This documentation can be carried out in a separate notebook or printed manual or in a
file with the documents. The procedure and sketch should be written by the student
manually.
logbook. The logbook and the practical documents should be submitted for the
● CA 4: All the exercises should be completed and kept for the practical test. The students
shall be permitted to select any one by lot for the test. The practical test (CA4) should
be conducted as per the scheme of evaluation as below. The marks awarded should be
converted to 20 Marks for the internal assessment.

REGULATION 2023
DME 22
1020233320 L T P C
WORKSHOP PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2
Part Description Marks
B Procedure 20
C Preparation 20
D Welding / Cutting/ Joining 20
E Accuracy / Tool Handling / Finish / Result 20
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 100
Syllabus Contents
Introduction Period
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS CODE OF PRACTICE FOR SAFETY AND HEALTH
REQUIREMENTS IN ELECTRIC AND GAS WELDING AND CUTTING OPERATIONS –
IS : 818 - 1968
Fire prevention and protection-Protection of personnel - general and protective
equipment- Work in confined spaces - ventilation and health protection.
Soldering - Basic principles – Brazing – Basic principles.
Practical Exercises 40 Periods

1. Lap joint Arc Welding (RawMaterial: 40 mm x 10 mm MS flat)
2. T- Joint - Arc Welding (RawMaterial: 40 mm x 10 mm MS flat)
3. Butt Joint (TIG / MIG Welding) (RawMaterial: MS Pipe / MS Square tube)
4. Profile cutting – circular profile - Gas cutting. (Raw Material: 100 x 100 mm X 6mm
M.S.Flat)

REGULATION 2023
DME 23
1020233320 L T P C
WORKSHOP PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2
5. Lap joint - Gas Welding - (Raw Material: 10G Mild Steel)

6. Spot welding - Lap joint - Make a tray and join the vulnerable points (Minimum 8 Points)
(Raw Material: GI/MS Sheet 22 G).
7. Solder as per the given circuit diagram.
8. Braze the joints of the copper tube. Prepare the tube with Cutting, bending, flaring,
Swaging and pinching practice.
9. Dismantle and Assemble the Bolt/Nut using wrench power tools. (Pneumatic / Electric).
(Sample Exercise Flange / Cylinder head / Remove Tire from the disc / etc…)
10. Profile cutting – Using Jigsaw/Craftsman cutter/Reciprocating cutter. (Raw Material:
100 x 100 mm X 6 mm M.S.Flat / Wood)
Test & Revision 10 Periods
Suggested List of Students Activity: 10 Periods

1. Study the welding symbols and welding testing procedure.
2. List Causes of welding defects and suggest remedies.
3. Practices in Soldering and Brazing. Compare the soldering and brazing process.
4. Enumerate safety guidelines and precautions for a welding shop.
5. Inspect the assembly lines in an Industry and submit a report.
Text and Reference Books:

1. Manufacturing Technology Vol-1 by P N RAO, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2. Manufacturing Technology Vol-2 by P N RAO, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
3. Elements of Workshop Technology Vol-1 by S K Hajra Choudhury, A K Hajra Choudhury,
Nirjhar Roy-Media Promoters & Publisher PVT. Ltd.
4. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS IN ELECTRIC AND GAS
WELDING AND CUTTING OPERATIONS ( First Revision ) IS : 818 – 1968- Seventh Reprint
SEPTEMBER 1998

REGULATION 2023
DME 24
1020233320 L T P C
WORKSHOP PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2
Web-based/Online Resources:
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RyLvVMg84xs -Basics of welding process2.
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nBwRpI_0d50 - Fundamentals of Brazing3.
3. ttps://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Wbd0mhOfGRg - Soldering Basics
END SEMESTER EXAMINATION – PRACTICAL EXAM.

BOARD EXAMINATIONS
Note:
● All the exercises have to be completed, any one exercise will be given for examination.
● All the exercises should be given in the question paper. The student is allowed to select
by lot or question papers issued by the DOTE Exam section shall be used.
● Practical documents along with the activity report should be submitted for the End
Semester Examinations.
DETAILED ALLOCATION OF MARKS.
B Procedure 20
C Preparation 20
D Welding / Cutting/ Joining 20
E Accuracy / Tool Handling / Finish / Result 20
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 25
1020233320 L T P C
WORKSHOP PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2
Equipment / Facilities required conducting the Practical Course.
S.No Name of the Equipment’s Quantity Required
1. Arc welding booth 2 Nos with welding transformer
2. TIG / MIG welding booth 1 No
3. Gas welding unit 1 Set ( Oxygen and acetylene cylinder)
4. Welding shield 5Nos
5. Gas welding goggles 5Nos
6. Chipping hammer 5Nos
7. Leather Gloves 18’’ 5 Sets
8. Spot welding machine 1 No
9. Brazing equipment 1 No
10. Soldering equipment 1 No

Electric Jig saw / Craftsman cutter /
11. 1 No
Reciprocating cutter
12. Pneumatic / Electric impact wrench 1 No
Cutting, bending, flaring, Swaging and
13. Each 1No
pinching tool for copper tube
14. Consumables Sufficient quantity

REGULATION 2023
DME 26
1020233320 L T P C
WORKSHOP PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2
Exercises drawing:
1. Lap Joint - Arc Welding (Raw Material: 40 mm X 10 mm MS flat)
2. T-Joint -Arc Welding (RawMaterial:40 mm X 10 mm MS flat)
3. Butt Joint-TIG / MIG Welding (Raw Material: MS Pipe / MS Square tube)
4. Profile cutting- Circular profile -cutting Gas cutting

( Raw Material : 100 x 100mm x 6mm M.S. flat)

REGULATION 2023
DME 27
1020233320 L T P C
WORKSHOP PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2
5. Lap joint - Gas Welding- (Raw Material: 10G Mild Steel)
6. Spot welding - Lap joint - Make a tray / dustpan and join the vulnerable points (Minimum
8 Points) (Raw Material: GI/MS Sheet 22 G)
7. Solder as per the given circuit diagram / Battery pack with series and parallel
connections.

REGULATION 2023
DME 28
1020233320 L T P C
WORKSHOP PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2
8. Braze the joints of the copper tube. Prepare the tube with Cutting, bending, flaring,
Swaging and pinching practice.
Cutting, bending, flaring, Swaging and pinching practice using copper tube.
9. Dismantle and Assemble the Bolt/Nut using wrench power tools. (Pneumatic / Electric).
(Sample Exercise Flange / Cylinder head / Remove Tire from the vehicle disc / etc…)

REGULATION 2023
DME 29
1020233320 L T P C
WORKSHOP PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2
10. Profile cutting – Using Jigsaw. (Raw Material: 100 x 100 mm X 6 mm M.S.Flat / Wood)

1. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS IN ELECTRIC AND GAS
WELDING AND CUTTING OPERATIONS ( First Revision ) IS : 818 – 1968 - Seventh Reprint
SEPTEMBER 1998.
2. Hajra Choudry & Battacharya - Elements of Workshop Technology - Vol. I & II -Edition 11, -
Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,– 2007.
3. P N RAO-Manufacturing technology - 5th edition - McGraw Hill, New Delhi.2018.
Web-based Online Resources:

● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dMcP3aCHyTQ Welding Processes – NPTEL-NOC
IITM
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TpvmJBeGUrg&list=PLyqSpQzTE6M-KwjFQByB
vRx464XpCgOEC&index=2 Classification of welding processes and definition of
welding arc - NEPTE - NOC IITM.

REGULATION 2023
DME 30
1020233440 L T P C
INDUSTRIAL DRIVES AND CONTROL
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
Motion control is required in a large number of industrial and domestic applications. Systems
employed for getting the required motion and their smooth control are called Drives. Drives
require prime movers like Diesel or petrol engines, gas or steam turbines, hydraulic motors or
electric motors. These prime movers deliver the required mechanical energy for getting the
motion and its control. Drives employing Electric motors as prime movers for motion control are
called Electric Drives. Further electrical speed control in almost all industrial applications are
incomplete without the use of the specific electric drive. This course will empower the students
with the necessary skills to understand the concept associated with Electrical Drives.
Course Objectives:
The objective of this course is to enable the student to
● Explain the necessity of A.C Circuit, Fuse, MCB, ELCB and Contactor.
● Explain the Working of RPS, Logic Gates and PLC.
● Define electric drive, its parts, advantages and explain choice of electric drive.
● Understand the characteristics of DC Shunt Motor and 3 Phase Induction Motor.
● Discuss the concept of AC Drive, Stepper Motor Drive and Servo Motor Drive.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Demonstrate the working of MCB, ELCB and Contactor.
CO2: Describe the working of RPS and Simple LED Circuit.
CO3: Describe the concept of Logic Gate and PLC.
CO4: Demonstrate the starting and speed control methods of Induction Motor.
CO5: Interface and test the working of Driver for DC Motor and Stepper Motor.
Pre-requisites:
Basics of Science and Engineering

REGULATION 2023
DME 31
1020233440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping:
CO1 3 1 1 2 -
CO2 3 1 1 2 -
CO3 3 1 1 2 -
CO4 3 1 1 2 -
CO5 3 1 1 2 -
● It is advised that teachers take steps to pique pupils' attention and boost their
curiosity to learn.
projects.
● Throughout the course, a theory-demonstrate-practice-activity strategy may be used
to ensure that learning is outcome and employability based.
● All demonstrations/Hand-on practices may be followed in the real environment as far
as possible.

REGULATION 2023
DME 32
1020233440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode Practical Practical Written Test Practical Practical

Test Test Theory Test Examination
Cycle I Cycle II
Portion Experiments/ Experiments/ All All
All Units
50% Another 50% Experiments Experiments
Experiments Experiments
Duration 2 Periods 2 Periods 3 Hours 3 Hours 3 hours
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15
60
Internal Marks 40
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
● CA1 and CA2: All the exercises/experiments should be completed as per the portions
above and kept for the practical test. The students shall be permitted to select any one
by lot for the test. The practical test should be conducted as per the scheme of
evaluation as below. The marks awarded shall be converted to 10 Marks for each
assessment test. Best of one will be considered for the internal assessment of 10
Marks.
Practical documents should be maintained for every experiment immediately after
completion of the practice. The practical document should be submitted for the practical
test. The same should be evaluated for 10 Marks for each exercise/experiment. The total

REGULATION 2023
DME 33
1020233440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Each experiment should be completed on the day of practice. The same shall be
evaluated for 10 marks on the day or next day of practice before commencement of the
next experiment.
This documentation can be carried out in a separate notebook or a printed manual or a
file with documents. The Circuit Diagram, Readings, Calculations and Graph / Result
should be written by the student manually.

A Aim & Apparatus Required 5
B Circuit Diagram 20
C Connections and Execution 25
TOTAL 50
D Practical Documents (As per the portions) 10
Total Marks 60
● CA 3: Written Test for complete theory portions should be conducted for 100 Marks as
per the question pattern below. The marks scored will be converted to 15 Marks for

REGULATION 2023
DME 34
1020233440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Question pattern – Written Test Theory

Description Marks
Part – A 30 MCQ Questions. 30 X 1 Mark 30 Marks
Part – B 7 Questions to be answered out of 10 7 X 10 Marks 70 Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
The students shall be permitted to select any one by lot for the test. The practical test
should be conducted as per the scheme of evaluation below. The marks awarded
should be converted to 15 Marks for the internal assessment.
Model Practical Examination and End Semester Examination - Practical Exam

D Output / Result 10
E Written Test (Theory Portions) 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100
Note: For the written test 30 MCQ shall be asked from the theory portions.

REGULATION 2023
DME 35
1020233440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus Contents.
Theory Portion : UNIT I
A.C CIRCUITS Period
Review of Ohm’s Law – Review of Series and Parallel Connection – Fundamentals 4

of AC Voltage and Current - Peak Value, Average Value, RMS value of Sine wave –
Frequency - Time period – Amplitude - Power and Power Factor – Current
calculation by using single phase power formula – Introduction about Three phase
ac supply - Current calculation by using three phase power formula - Necessity of
Contactor - Solenoid type Contactor - Necessity of Fuse – Function of MCB –
Function of ELCB.
ANALOG AND DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
Name, Symbol and uses of Semiconductor Devices (Diode, Transistor, LED and 4
SCR) – Importance of current limiting resistor in LED circuit – RGB LED - Working of
Half wave and Full wave rectifiers - Block Diagram of Regulated Power Supply.
Logic gates: Binary Number System - Positive and Negative Logic - Definition,
Symbol, Truth table and Boolean expression for OR, AND, NOT, NOR, NAND, EX-OR
and EX-NOR gates - Universal Logic Gates: NAND and NOR.
Programmable Logic Controller: Definition - Block Diagram of Programmable Logic
Controller – PLC Scan – Ladder Logic for AND Gate and OR Gate.
Practical Exercises:
Ex.No Name of the Experiment Period
1. VOLTAGE, CURRENT AND POWER MEASUREMENT IN SINGLE PHASE AC 4

CIRCUIT.
Activities to Perform:
a) Conduct an experiment to measure voltage, current and power in
a single phase a.c circuit by using Voltmeter, Ammeter and
Wattmeter respectively for different loads.

REGULATION 2023
DME 36
1020233440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
b) Repeat the same experiment by replacing above meters with a

single Digital Power Monitor.
c) Compare and Discuss the observations.
2. CONSTRUCT LED CIRCUIT WITH CURRENT LIMITING RESISTOR 4
a) From the voltage and current rating of the given LED, calculate
the value of the resistor to be connected in series with it.
b) Construct and test a simple circuit using DC Source, Resistor and
LED.
c) Construct and test a simple circuit using DC Source, Resistor and
RGB LED.
3. CONSTRUCT DC REGULATED POWER SUPPLY UNIT 4
a) Construct 5V or 12V DC Regulated Power Supply circuit using
Bridge Rectifier, Capacitor Filter and IC Voltage Regulator.
b) Observe the voltage at various stages of the circuit.
c) Discuss the function of each stage of the RPS unit.
4. DEMONSTRATE THE WORKING OF MCB AND ELCB 4
a) Connect Single Pole MCB with Load bank and Test the Tripping
Operation for over load and/or Short Circuit fault.
b) Connect ELCB with Lamp Load and Test the Tripping Operation
for Earth fault.
5. LOGIC GATE USING ICs 4
a) Construct the circuit and verify the Truth Tables of AND, OR, NOT,
NAND, NOR, EX-OR Logic gates by using corresponding Logic
Gate ICs.
b) Compare and Discuss the observations.

REGULATION 2023
DME 37
1020233440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Theory Portion : UNIT II
ELECTRIC DRIVES
Introduction – Need for Drive – Advantages of Electric Drive – Parts of Electric 7

Drive – Classification of Drives (Group Drive, Individual Drive and Multimotor Drive)
– Classification of Electric Motors - Characteristics of DC Shunt Motor and DC
Series Motor – Necessity of starters - Three point starter.
Construction, Working Principle and Characteristics of Three Phase squirrel cage
induction motor – DOL Starter – Star Delta Starter - Effect of Unbalanced source
voltage and Single Phasing – Methods of Speed control of three phase induction
motor - Block diagram of Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) - Electric Braking – Types
of Electrical Braking – Selection of Motors for different applications – Motors used
for Traction system.
Overview of PMDC Motor, BLDC Motor, Stepper Motor Drive, Servo Motor Drive –
L293D Motor Driver IC.
6. LOAD TEST ON DC SHUNT MOTOR 4

Activity to Perform:
a) Conduct Load Test on given DC Shunt Motor
b) Discuss the starting current and No load current of the Motor
c) Plot the performance Characteristics.
7. LOAD TEST ON THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR 4
a) Conduct Load Test on given three phase squirrel cage Induction
Motor.
b) Discuss the starting current and No load current of the Motor
c) Plot the performance Characteristics.

REGULATION 2023
DME 38
1020233440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
8. SPEED CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTOR USING VFD 4

a) Make connections and Control the speed of the given single
phase or three phase squirrel cage induction motor by VFD.
b) Discuss the features and advantages of VFD.
9. DIRECTION CONTROL OF DC MOTOR USING DRIVER IC L293D 4
a) Interface L293D Motor Driver IC with Arduino to control Direction
of rotation of Two DC Motors.
b) Execute the Arduino program and observe the direction of
rotation of Motors.
10. TESTING OF STEPPER MOTOR DRIVE 4
a) Interface suitable stepper motor driver with stepper motor.
b) Test the operation of the driver circuit by observing the movement
of the stepper motor.
Assessment Test + Revision + Students Activity 20
Total 75

Activity 1: Study and understand the construction and working of DC Generator, Transformer
and Alternators available in the Laboratory. Then each student shall write and submit the Report
on the above topics.
Activity 2: Four students can be grouped as a batch to collect information about Industrial
applications of various types of Electric Motors and submit as activity report. Reference books /
website details/ Visited Industry details for collection of above information must be mentioned
in the report itself.

REGULATION 2023
DME 39
1020233440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Text book for Reference:

1. B. L. Theraja and A. K. Theraja, A Textbook of Electrical Technology Volume - II (AC and
DC Machines), Multicolour Edition, S. Chand & Co., 2005.
2. V K Mehta, Rohit Mehta, Principles of Electronics, 12 th Edition, S. Chand & Co.,
2020.
3. B.N. Sarkar, Fundamentals of Industrial Drives, 1 st Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2012.
4. Frank D. Petruzella, Programmable Logic Controllers, 6 th Edition, Indian Edition, Mc
Graw Hill, 2023.
● https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/104/108104140/#
● https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105155/

REGULATION 2023
DME 40
1020233440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Equipment / Facilities required to conduct the Practical Course.
S.No Name of the Equipment’s Quantity

Required
1. MI Ammeter 0-5A, MI Voltmeter 0- 300V, ED Wattmeter 300V/5A, Each 1 No.
Digital Power Monitor, Lamp Load.
2. 5V/12V DC Power Supply Unit, LED, RGB LED and Resistors. Each 1 No.
3. 230V/12V Transformer, Diodes, Filter Capacitor, Voltage Regulator Each 1 No.

IC, Resistors and CRO.
4. 3 Amps MCB and 30mA ELCB. Each 1 No.
5. 5V RPS, Logic Gate ICs: 7408, 7432, 7404, 7400, 7402 & 7486, Each 5 Nos.
Toggle Switches, LEDs and Resistors.
6. DC Shunt Motor with Starting and Loading arrangements. 1 No.
7. Contactor and NO, NC Push buttons. Each 1 No.
8. 3 Phase Squirrel Cage Induction Motor with Starting and Loading 1 No.
arrangements.
9. Variable Frequency Drive. 1 No.
10. DC Motor, L293D Motor Driver IC and Arduino Shield. 1 No.
11. Stepper Motor with Driver Shield. 1 No.
12. Suitable range of MC Voltmeter and Ammeter for DC Motor. Each 1 No.
13. Suitable range of MI Voltmeter and Ammeter for AC Motor. Each 1 No.
14. Tachometer. 1 No.
15. Digital Multimeter. 4 Nos.
Note:
● Sufficient number of Worktables to be provided in the laboratory to conduct experiments
for students.

REGULATION 2023
DME 41
1020233440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
● Ensure Permanent wiring connections with suitable circuit breakers / Protective

mechanism in the Worktables with proper safety measures.
● In addition to the above list sufficient quantities of consumable, Tools and Testing
Instruments to be maintained.
● Charts on Electrical Safety and Procedure of First Aid to be displayed in the Laboratory.
● Necessary proper electrical safety arrangements should be done in the laboratory.
● Awareness about the First Aid for Electrical accidents should be given.
END SEMESTER EXAMINATIONS – PRACTICAL EXAM

Note:
All the exercises should be completed before the Board Practical Examinations. End Semester
Practical examination should be conducted for all the exercises / experiments for 100 Marks.
Students will be permitted to select any one exercise by lot or question paper supplied by the
DOTE Exam section shall be used. The practical document prepared by the student should be
submitted with a Bonafide Certificate.

C Connections / Execution 25
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 42
1020233540 L T P C
PRODUCTION DRAWING & MODELLING
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
Production Drawing & Modelling is a crucial aspect of design and manufacturing processes. It
involves creating detailed technical drawings and three-dimensional models to communicate
product specifications and aid in production. This discipline ensures precision, efficiency and
consistency in manufacturing various products across industries in engineering and product
design.
Course Objectives:
● Understand fundamental principles: Learn the foundational concepts, principles, and
standards of production drawing and modelling, including geometric dimensioning and
tolerance (GD&T), drafting conventions, and industry-specific guidelines.
● Develop technical drawing skills: Acquire proficiency in creating accurate and detailed
technical drawings using CAD software, focusing on orthographic projections, isometric
views, section views, and assembly drawings.
● Master 3D modelling techniques: Gain expertise in constructing three-dimensional
models of objects and components using CAD software, emphasise solid modelling,
surface modelling, parametric modelling, and assembly modelling.
● Interpret engineering documentation: Learn to interpret and analyse engineering
drawings, specifications, and other technical documents to extract relevant information
for manufacturing processes, including material specifications, geometric tolerances,
and assembly instructions.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Draw various sectional views of 2D assembly drawings manually as per BIS.
CO2: Create sectional views for 2D assembly drawing.
CO3: Create 3D modelling using CAD software module.
CO4: Interpret the drawing and symbols in the Engineering field.

REGULATION 2023
DME 43
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO5: Demonstrate proficiency in 3D modelling by creating and assembling machine

components.
Pre-requisites:
DRAFTING PRACTICES
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 2
CO3 2 1 2
CO4 2 1 2
CO5 2 1 2
● Utilise a blended approach with lectures on manual drawing fundamentals and CAD
software introduction.
● Incorporate hands-on sessions for manual drawing practice and CAD software usage.
● Assignments focus on creating detailed drawings of machine parts, transitioning to CAD
for 3D modelling, assembly, and printing components.
● Encourage peer collaboration and feedback.

REGULATION 2023
DME 44
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)

Drafting
Theory Drafting
Drafting Drafting Practices
Portions and Practices
Practices Practices and Solid
Assembled and Solid
Portion and Solid and Solid modelling
views modelling
modelling modelling Practices.
Manual Practices.
Practices Practices (All
Drawing (All (All
(Ex 1 and 2) (Ex 3, and 4) Exercises)
Portions) Exercises)
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 45
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

experiment.
The Assembled views for the exercises during Manual drawing practice should be
submitted in the drawing sheet (4 Drawing sheet). The print out of the assembled view
during drafting practices should be submitted (4 printout). The printout of the solid
modelling practices should be submitted (4 printout). The 12 documents should be kept
in a file with a Bonafide certificate.
PART A – Drafting Practices
A Command / Creation Procedure 10
B 2D View with Dimensions 15
PART B – Solid modelling Practices
C Creation Part Modelling 10
D CAD Modelling (3D) 15
Practical Total 50
E Practical Documents (As per the portions) 10
Total 60

REGULATION 2023
DME 46
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks
Manual Assembled Drawing
Part – A Two views of the Assemble Drawing. Front View - 50 Marks

Front view and Top View / Side View in the 30 Marks.
drawing sheet. (With or without section / Top View /
Half section). (30 + 20 = 50 Marks). Any Side View -
one exercise can be given by lot. 20 Marks.
Theory Portions
Part – B 20 One Mark questions (MCQ) should be 20 X 1 Mark 20 Marks

answered.
Part – C Three Ten Marks questions should be 3 X 10 Marks 30 Marks
answered from Six questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
should be conducted as per the scheme of evaluation below. After completion of all
the exercises the practical test should be conducted as per End Semester Examination
question pattern scheme of evaluation. The marks awarded should be converted to 15
Marks for the internal assessment.

REGULATION 2023
DME 47
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
A Command / Creation 10
C Printout 5
D Creation Part Modelling 10
E CAD Modelling (3D) 15
F Assembly of the parts 20
G Printout 5
H Written test (Theory Portions only) 10
I Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 100
Syllabus contents
Theory Portion
SECTIONAL VIEWS 15
Sectioning - sectional views – representation of sectional plane – hatching –
inclination – spacing – hatching large areas – hatching adjacent parts - full section
– half section – types of half sections – conventional representation of materials in
section.
GEOMETRIC DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCES.
Importance of GD&T - Tolerance specification and interpretation - Tolerance symbols
- Features - Datum plane and Axis - Shaft basis and hole basis system.

REGULATION 2023
DME 48
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Material Condition Modifiers. Maximum Material Condition (MMC) - Least Material

Condition (LMC) - Feature Control Frames
Manual Drawing Practice
Detailed drawings of the following machine components will be given to students to 15

draw the assembled views. Only the assembled Front view (Without section / Full
Section / Half Section) and Top view or Side view (Without section / Full Section /
Half Section) with dimensions and Bill of materials in the Drawing Sheet.
Note: All the exercises drawing sheet should be submitted for the model and end
semester examination as a record of work done.
COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING (CAD) PRACTICES
PART A - Drafting Practices: 15

2D Drafting Practices - Draw the front view of the assembled drawing of the
components with dimensions.
PART B - Solid modelling Practices: 15

Detailed drawings of the machine components will be given to students to create the
solid modelling and assemble using any CAD software in the computer and take the
printout.
Machine Components for the Practical Exercises
1. Sleeve and Cotter Joint.

2. Plummer Block.
3. Flange Coupling.
4. Bushed Bearing.
Practice + Test + Revision 15

REGULATION 2023
DME 49
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

● Students should practice production drawing with the GD&T representation.
● Modelling competitions can be arranged.

1. A beginner’s guide to 3D modeling by Cameron Coward
2. Solidworks 2022 step by step guide by Amit Bhatt and Mark Wiley
● https://www.autodesk.in/campaigns/autocad-tytorials
● https://www.mycadsite.com/tutorials.html
● NPTEL Lecturers

1. Personal computer – 30 Nos.
2. Printer – 1 No.
3. Required Software: CAD Package/ Parametric Software packages– Sufficient to the
strength.

REGULATION 2023
DME 50
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Note: All the exercises should be completed before the Board Practical Examinations. End
Semester Practical examination should be conducted for all exercises for 100 Marks as per the
pattern. Students will be permitted to select any one exercise by lot or question paper supplied
by the DOTE Exam section shall be used.
Practical documents should be submitted for the End Semester Examination with a bonafide
certificate.
A Command / Creation 10
C Printout 5
D Creation Part Modelling 10
E CAD Modelling (3D) 15
F Assembly of the parts 20
G Printout 5
H Written test (Theory Portions only) 10
I Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 51
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
EXERCISE DRAWINGS

REGULATION 2023
DME 52
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

REGULATION 2023
DME 53
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

REGULATION 2023
DME 54
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

REGULATION 2023
DME 55
1020233540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

REGULATION 2023
DME 56
1020233640 L T P C
MACHINE TOOL TECHNOLOGY
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
To meet out Globalization, technological advances and to sustain ourselves we have to explore
the knowledge about machine tools covering the various operations and skill sets required for
the development of a nation and its people.
Course Objectives:
1. Expose to the Concept and Basic Mechanics of Metal Cutting

2. Familiarise with working of Standard Machine Tools such as Lathe and Milling.
3. Familiarise with the working of the Grinding Process.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Discuss with various mechanics of metal cutting and operations performed in Lathe
CO2: Illustrate various milling operations
CO3:Describe the various grinding processes.
CO4: Manufacture of gears using milling machine
CO5: Perform finishing operations using grinding machines.
Pre-requisites:
Applied science, Basic workshop practice

2023 REGULATION
DME 57
1020233640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3
confidence.

2023 REGULATION
DME 58
1020233640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)

Cycle I Cycle II
Portion Exercises Exercises
All Units All Exercises All Exercises
50% Another 50%
Exercises Exercises
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Marks.
practical test. The same should be evaluated for 10 Marks for each exercise/experiment.

2023 REGULATION
DME 59
1020233640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
The total marks awarded should be converted to 10 Marks for the practical test as per
the scheme of evaluation as below.
exercise.
This documentation can be carried out in a separate notebook or printed manual or a file
with documents. Students should write the procedure and draw the sketch manually.
A Aim / Tools required 5
B Preparation / Procedure 20
C Operation / Machining / Measurements 25
TOTAL 50
60

2023 REGULATION
DME 60
1020233640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks
Part – A 30 MCQ from the complete theory portions. 30 X 1 Mark 30 Marks
Part – B Seven Questions to be answered out of 10 7 X 10 Marks 70 Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks

D Finish / Dimensions 10
E Written Test (Theory portions) 30
F Viva voce 10
TOTAL 100

2023 REGULATION
DME 61
1020233640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus Contents
Theory Portion Period
Chapter 1: 15
Theory of Metal Cutting: Chip Formation, Orthogonal Cutting- Oblique Cutting - Tool
Geometry – Tool nomenclature – Cutting tool materials - cutting parameters. Lathe
- Centre Lathe: Introduction - specifications –machining operations done on lathe.
Chapter 2:
Milling - Milling cutters classification only-Milling operations-types-straddle milling -
gang milling.Indexing-Indexing plate – Indexing methods - simple indexing,
differential indexing.Generating Process: gear shaper - gear hobbing - principle of
operation only.
Chapter 3:
Grinding: Grinding Process – Cylindrical Grinding, Surface Grinding, Centre less
Grinding-principles of operation only. – grinding wheels – abrasives - natural and
artificial diamond wheels - types of bonds - grit, grade and structure of wheels -
wheel shapes and sizes - standard marking systems of grinding wheels - selection
of grinding wheel - mounting of grinding wheels - Dressing and Truing of wheels -
Balancing of grinding wheels.
Practical Exercises
I. LATHE 50
1. Grooving and Taper Turning.
2. LH Thread cutting.
3. RH Thread cutting.
4. Bush: Turning & Drilling
5. Eccentric Turning.
II. MILLING MACHINE
6. Make Spur Gear using milling machine by simple Indexing
7. Make helical gear using milling machine

2023 REGULATION
DME 62
1020233640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
III. GRINDING
8. Grind a plain surface using surface Grinder
9. Make progressive type plug gauge using cylindrical grinding machine
10. Make a turning tool / milling cutter using a tool and cutter grinder.
Test + Revision 10
Total 75
Cycle - I Exercise 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 - 5 Exercises
Cycle - II Exercise 4, 5, 7, 9, 10 - 5 Exercises

1. Observe the Lathe machine in the institute and study its specifications. List the possible
operations that can be done on that machine.
2. Study different reciprocating machines available and draw the line sketch to study the
working principle.
3. Study the types of grinding wheels available for industrial applications. Classify the
abrasive materials and its properties. .

1. CHAPMAN W. A. J - Workshop Technology Part 1-5 th edition- CBS-2001.
2. CHAPMAN W. A. J - Workshop Technology Part 2-4 th Edition-CBS-2007.
3. R S Khurmi - A Textbook Of Workshop Technology : Manufacturing Processes -16 TH
Edition- S Chand & Company-2021.
Web-based Online Resources:
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6ISddRRHAhA - Introduction to Manufacturing
Process Technology - NPTEL IIT Kanpur.
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=B8w-0Oi0Yf4 - Gear Manufacturing - NPTEL - IIT
Kharagpur.
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kb0RowB8Myo - Introduction of Machining
Processes- NPTEL IIT Kanpur.

2023 REGULATION
DME 63
1020233640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
END SEMESTER EXAMINATION – PRACTICAL EXAM

Note:
All the exercises should be given in the question paper and students are allowed to select by a
lot or the question paper allotted from the DOTE shall be used.
Practical document should be submitted for the examination with a bonafide certificate.

D Finish / Dimensions 10
E Written Test (MCQ question) 30
F Viva voce 10
TOTAL 100

2023 REGULATION
DME 64
1020233640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Exercises drawing:
All the dimensions are in mm.
I. LATHE
Make the following jobs in the lathe. Raw material :______ M.S. Round Rod
1. Grooving and Taper Turning.
2. LH Thread cutting.
3. RH Thread cutting.

2023 REGULATION
DME 65
1020233640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
4. Bush: Turning & Drilling
5. Eccentric Turning.
II. MILLING
Make the following jobs in the milling machine.
Raw material :______ M.S. Round Rod
6. Make Spur Gear using milling machine by simple Indexing

2023 REGULATION
DME 66
1020233640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
7. Make helical gear using milling machine
III. GRINDING
Make the following jobs in the Grinding machine using given raw material.
8. Grind a plain surface using surface Grinder
9. Make progressive type plug gauge using cylindrical grinding machine

2023 REGULATION
DME 67
1020233640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
10. Make a turning tool / milling cutter using tool and cutter grinder.
List of Equipments Required
Sl. No. Name of the Machine / Equipment / Instrument Quantity Required
1 Lathe 10 Nos.
2 Universal Milling Machine 2 Nos.
3 Surface Grinding Machine 1 No.
4 Cylindrical Grinding Machine 1 No.
5 Tool and Cutter Grinding Machine 1 No.
6 Safety Glasses 10 Nos.
7 Tools and Measuring Instruments Sufficient Quantity
8 Consumables Sufficient Quantity

2023 REGULATION
DME 68
1020234110 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING L T P C
THEORY TECHNOLOGY 3 0 0 3
Introduction:
Use of innovative technologies to create existing products and the creation of new products.
Advanced manufacturing can include production activities that depend on information,
automation, computation, software, sensing, and networking
Course Objectives:
● Explain the different methods of plastic manufacturing processes
● Explain the various concepts of modern machining, super finishing process and surface
treatment
● To make acquainted the various unconventional manufacturing processes
● Write part program for manufacturing components in CNC machines
● Explain the rapid prototyping technologies in manufacturing
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Describe the various methods of plastic manufacturing
CO2: Explain the modern machining processes, super finishing processes and various surface
treatment methods
CO3: Describe the unconventional Machining processes
CO4: Explain the CNC Machines and ability to apply "G codes" and "M codes in CNC
programming
CO5: Apply the rapid prototyping technologies in manufacturing
Pre-requisites:
Production Technology, Machine Tools, Metal Cutting, Computer applications

REGULATION 2023
DME 69
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 2 2 1
CO2 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 1
CO4 2 2 1
CO5 2 2 1
● Engage and Motivate: Teachers should actively engage students to boost their learning
confidence
● To help students learn and appreciate numerous concepts and principles in each area,
teachers should provide examples from daily life, realistic situations, and real-world
engineering and technological applications.
● The demonstration can make the subject exciting and foster in the students a scientific
mindset. Student activities should be planned on all the topics.
● Throughout the course, a theory-demonstrate-practice-activity strategy may be used to
ensure that learning is outcome- and employability-based.

REGULATION 2023
DME 70

Examination
CA1 CA2 CA3 CA4
(60 marks)
Quiz
Written test
Mode (Another Two
units)
Offline)
Exam Marks 50 50 60 100 100

Converted
15 15 5 20 60
to
Marks 15 5 20 60
Tentative
Schedule
permitted.

REGULATION 2023
DME 71
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents
Unit I Types of plastics and processing of plastics

Types of Plastics: Engineering plastics – thermosets – comparison of 9
thermoplastic and thermosetting plastics - composite - structural foam, elastomers
- polymer alloys and liquid crystal polymers.
Processing of Plastics
Extrusion - single screw extrusion - twin screw extruders and types - Injection
moulding types: Plunger type - Reciprocating screw injection - structural foam
injection mould - sandwich moulding - gas injection moulding – calendaring and
rotational moulding. Design consideration for plastic components.
Unit II Modern Machining ,Super finishing and Surface treatment processes
Modern Machining Processes: 9
Precision and ultra precision machining - Micro and nano machining and
High-speed Machining – hot machining-basic principles, working, applications,
advantages
Super finishing processes : introduction– working principle of Honing – lapping
–burnishing – polishing –buffing – advantages - applications

REGULATION 2023
DME 72
Surface treatment processes: Introduction – working principle – surface hardening

- shot peening - galvanizing – powder coating - thermal spraying - Vapour
deposition Processes types - Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) – Physical Vapour
Deposition (PVD) - sputtering – Electroplating – cladding – hot dipping – painting -
advantages – applications.
Unit III Unconventional Machining Processes
Introduction – classification - construction and working principle of abrasive jet 8
machining (AJM) – water jet machining (WJM) – ultrasonic machining (USM) –
electrical discharge machine (EDM) - electron beam machining (EBM) – laser beam
machining (LBM) – plasma arc machining (PAM) – Chemical Machining (CHM) –
Electro Chemical Machining (ECM) -advantages – disadvantages and applications.
Unit IV CNC Machines and CNC Programming
CNC machines: 11
Numerical control – definition – working principle of a CNC system - advantages of
CNC machines – difference between NC and CNC – construction and working
principle of turning centre – construction and working principle of machining centre
- machine axes conventions turning centre and machining centre – coordinate
measuring machine (CMM) – construction and working principle.
CNC Programming:
Introduction – Cartesian coordinate system – Polar coordinate system –Absolute
and incremental positioning – Purpose of G and M codes. – CNC program.
Procedure - Homing position – Offset setting -Work offset setting procedure – Tool
offset - CNC turning program using linear interpolation and circular interpolation.–
CNC milling program using linear interpolation and circular interpolation - .
compensation

REGULATION 2023
DME 73
Unit V Rapid Prototyping

Introduction - Classification –subtractive – additive – advantages and applications 8
– materials- Working Principles, Methods, Stereolithography, Laser Sintering, Fused
Deposition Method, 3D printing - Working Principle - Applications and Limitations,
Rapid tooling, Overview of other techniques in rapid manufacturing.
TOTAL HOURS 45
● Presentation/Seminars by students on any recent technological developments based on
the course
● Online MCQ have to be conducted for all the five units.
● Blended learning activities to explore the recent trends and developments in the field.
1. V. K. Jain, Advanced Machining Processes, 1 st edition , Allied Publications,2010.
2. Mikell P. Groover , Automation, Production Systems, and Computer- Integrated
Manufacturing, 3 rd edition, Pearson Education Asia,2008.
3. P. Radhakrishnan, S. Subramanyam, CAD/CAM/CIM,2 nd edition, New Age
International,2008.
● https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc24_me72/preview



REGULATION 2023
DME 74
1020234230 L T P C
FLUID MECHANICS
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Introduction:
The principles of fluid mechanics play a vital role in various aspects of our daily lives,
influencing everything from the functioning of essential machines to the natural phenomena
that shape our world. Understanding the significance of fluid mechanics helps us appreciate its
impact on diverse fields. It is a cornerstone of modern engineering and science, with profound
implications for numerous aspects of our lives. Its principles enable advancements in
technology, contribute to environmental sustainability, and enhance our understanding of the
natural world.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Describe the measurement of fluid pressure and its applications.
CO2: Measure the flow rate of fluid by using venturi meter and orifice meter.
CO3: Compute the friction factor for the pipeline.
CO4: Analyse the performance of turbines.
CO5: Evaluate the performance of pumps
Pre-requisites:
Mathematical skills, Mechanics.
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 1 - 3
CO2 3 1 - 3
CO3 3 1 - 3
CO4 3 1 - 3
CO5 3 1 - 3

REGULATION 2023
DME 75
1020234230 L T P C
FLUID MECHANICS
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
● Engage and Motivate: Instructors should actively engage students to boost their
learning confidence.
● Interactive Learning: Utilize demonstrations and plan interactive student activities
for an engaging learning experience.
● Encourage Critical Analysis: Foster an environment where students can honestly
assess experiment outcomes and analyze potential sources of error in case of
discrepancies
Semester
(60 marks)
Written
Examination
Mode (Complete
Theory
Portions)
Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule

REGULATION 2023
DME 76
1020234230 L T P C
FLUID MECHANICS
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Note:
Each experiment observation and calculations should be completed on the day of
practice. The same shall be evaluated for 10 marks on the day or next day of practice
before commencement of the next exercise.
file with documents. The student should write the reading and calculations and the result
and graph should be prepared manually.
The evaluated practical document should be submitted for the Practical Test (CA3). The

REGULATION 2023
DME 77
1020234230 L T P C
FLUID MECHANICS
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3

A Aim / Apparatus required 10
B Procedure / Observation / Tabular coloumn 20
C Formula / Calculation 20
D Result / Graph 10
E Practical document (All Experiments) 30
F Viva Voce 10
Total 100
assessment.
Question Pattern:
marks each.

REGULATION 2023
DME 78
1020234230 L T P C
FLUID MECHANICS
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Syllabus Contents
Unit I FLUID AND FLUID PROPERTIES
Theory: 5
Concept and classification of fluid, Properties of fluid - Density - Specific
weight - Specific volume - Specific gravity - Viscosity - Surface tension -
Cohesion & Adhesion – Capillarity - Bulk modulus of elasticity - Vapor
Pressure - Description and Simple problems.
Practical: 2
1. Demonstrate various fluid properties viscosity, surface tension, cohesion &
Adhesion and capillarity.
Unit II PRESSURE MEASURING DEVICES
Theory: 5
Pressure head- atmospheric gauge and vacuum pressure – Classification of
pressure measuring devices - Working and application of pressure measuring
devices: Piezometer- Simple U tube manometers – Differential U tube
manometers – problems - Pressure Gauges - Description.
Practical: 3
2. Measure the fluid pressure using a simple manometer and pressure
gauge. Find the pressure difference using differential manometer.
Unit III FLUID KINEMATICS & FLUID DYNAMICS
Theory: 8
Fluid Kinematics: Streamline, path line and streak lines and stream tube,
classification of fluid flows‐Reynolds number, steady & unsteady, uniform,
non-uniform, laminar, turbulent, rotational, and irrotational flows‐equation of
continuity for one dimensional flow.
Fluid Dynamics: Energies of fluid-Bernoulli’s equations for flow along a
streamline - Description and simple problems - Applications of Bernoulli’s
theorem - Venturimeter and Orificemeter - Description.

REGULATION 2023
DME 79
1020234230 L T P C
FLUID MECHANICS
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Practical: 6
3. Verify Bernoulli's theorem.
4. Measure the discharge of the fluid flow using venturi meter or Orifice Meter.
Unit IV FLOW THROUGH PIPES
Theory: 4
Introduction to pipe and pipe flow - Major and minor losses - Reynold's experiment,
friction factor, Darcy's and Chezy's equations - Description only, Moody's chart-
Water hammer and cavitation, its cause, effect, and remedies.
Practical: 3
5. Find the friction factor for the given pipeline.
Unit V HYDRAULIC MACHINES
Theory: 8
Reciprocating Pump: classifications - single and Double Acting Reciprocating
Pump - Working - Discharge, coefficient of discharge, Air vessels.
Centrifugal Pump: Classification - working of Single stage Centrifugal Pump - Main
components of centrifugal pump - head of pump - priming - self priming – pumps
in series & parallel - losses in centrifugal pumps - selection of pump.
Hydraulic Turbines: Introduction - Classification of turbines, impulse turbine -
construction and working of impulse turbine - reaction turbines - construction and
working of Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine - draft tube and its types – surge
tank - selection of hydraulic turbines.
Practical: 6
6. Perform a test on the reciprocating pump or centrifugal pump test rig and find
the efficiency.
7. Perform a test on a hydraulic turbine test rig and find the efficiency.
Test + Revision 10
TOTAL HOURS 60

REGULATION 2023
DME 80
1020234230 L T P C
FLUID MECHANICS
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3

● Compare the following liquids concerning their density (for the same mass, compare the
volume) (1) Petrol (2) Water (3) Edible oil (4) Caster oil (5) Mercury
● Compare the following liquids concerning their viscosity (for the same temperature,
compare the velocity) (1) Petrol (2) Water (3) Edible oil (4) Caster oil (5) Mercury
● Calculate the water weight when your home's water tank is completely filled with water.
● Observe the working of a Hydraulic Jack and relate it with Pascal's law.
● Observe the discharge water condition from a pipe at the time of car washing with a
nozzle and without a nozzle and explain the difference considering Bernoulli's equation.
● Draw a line diagram of the water supply & distribution line of your hydraulic lab and
indicate the source of major and minor losses in it.
● Visit the manufacturer's website for hydraulic pumps, collect the catalog, and select a
suitable pump for your home application.
● Prepare a demonstration model of the hydroelectric power plant.
● Prepare a demonstration model of the hydraulic devices.
● Observe pressure gauges used by roadside tire workers, blood pressure measurement by
doctors and pressure gauges mounted on a turbine test rig and write a report on it.
● Prepare a report on real life applications of hydraulic systems and pneumatic systems at
your college.
Text Books & Reference Books:

1. A Textbook of Hydraulics, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, R.S. Khurmi, -
Edn.18, S.Chand & Co., New Delhi.
2. A Textbook of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines – by R. K Rajput and and
S.Chand & Co, New Delhi.
3. Hydraulic Machines, Jagadishlal, , Metropolitan Book Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
4. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, R. K. Bansal, Laxmi Publications Pvt., Ltd, New
Delhi.

REGULATION 2023
DME 81
1020234230 L T P C
FLUID MECHANICS
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105206
4. https://www.classcentral.com/course/youtube-fluid-mechanics-concept-derivation-
videos-53034
5. https://fmc-nitk.vlabs.ac.in/fluid-machinery/exp/centrifugal-pump/index.html
6. https://me.iitp.ac.in/Virtual-Fluid-Laboratory/
7. https://eerc03-iiith.vlabs.ac.in/List%20of%20experiments.html
8. https://fm-nitk.vlabs.ac.in/List%20of%20experiments.html
Equipment / Facilities required for conducting the Practical Course.

1. Pressure Measuring Devices Sufficient quantity.
2. Bernoulli's theorem experimental set up 1 no.
3. Venturi Meter or Orificemeter experimental setup 1 no.
4. Pipe friction factor experimental set up 1 no.
5. Centrifugal Pump experimental set up (or)
Reciprocating Pump experimental set up 1 no.
6. Hydraulic turbine test rig. 1 no.
Required instruments and consumables.


REGULATION 2023
DME 82
PRACTICAL TECHNOLOGY PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2
Introduction:
They are able to prepare part programs and operate CNC lathe and Milling machines. They are
ready to apply the practical knowledge on 3D printing and robotics to real industrial environment
Course Objectives:
● Features and selection of CNC turning and milling machines.

● Practice in part programming and operation of CNC turning machines, subroutine
techniques and use of cycles.
● Study the components of the CNC machine and machine settings
● Machining the components by the CNC machines
● Study the working of 3D printing and robotics and its applications
Course Outcomes:

CO1: Recall the safety procedure to be followed shop floor.
CO2: Produce components on CNC Turning.
CO3: Create components on CNC Milling.
CO4: Develop components using 3D printer.
CO5. Generate robot programming for different applications.
Pre-requisites:
Basic knowledge on working principle CNC machines,3D printing, Robots

Basic working practice of Lathe & Milling machines

2023 REGULATION
DME 83
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 2 2 3 1
CO2 2 2 3 1
CO3 2 3 3 1
CO4 2 2 3 1
CO5 2 2 3 1
o Engage and Motivate: Teachers should actively engage students to boost their learning
confidence
o To help students learn and appreciate numerous concepts and principles in each area,
o The demonstration can make the subject exciting and foster in the students a scientific
o Throughout the course, a theory-demonstrate-practice-activity strategy may be used to
ensure that learning is outcome- and employability-based.
o Simulation and Real-World Practice: Conduct demonstrations and hands-on activities in
a simulated environment, transitioning to real-world scenarios when possible

2023 REGULATION
DME 84

Semester
(60 marks)
Mode Practical Test Practical Test Practical Practical
Practical Test
Document Examination
Portion First Cycle Second Cycle All Exercises All Exercises All Exercises
Duration 2 Periods 2 Periods Regularly 3 Hours 3 Hours
Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100
Marks 10 10 20 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
● CA1 and CA2: All the exercises/experiments as per the portions mentioned above
should be completed and kept for the practical test. The students shall be permitted to
select any one by lot for the test. The practical test should be conducted as per the
scheme of evaluation as below. The marks awarded will be converted to 10 Marks for
each assessment test. Best of one will be considered for the internal assessment of 10
Marks.
Cycle 1 - Exercises 1, 2, 4, 5 and 7.
Cycle 2 - Exercises 3, 6, 8, 9 and 10.

2023 REGULATION
DME 85
B Writing CNC Program / Modelling / Editing 20
C Simulation / Slicing 20
TOTAL 50
● CA 3: Practical document should be maintained for every exercise immediately after

completion of the practice. The same should be evaluated for 10 Marks. The total marks
awarded should be converted to 10 Marks for the internal assessment. The practical
document should be submitted for the Practical Test and End Semester Examination
with a bonafide certificate
exercise.
file with documents. The part program and sketch should be written by the student
manually.
● CA 4: All the exercises should be completed and kept for the practical test. The students
shall be permitted to select any one by lot for the test. The practical test should be
conducted as per the scheme of evaluation as below. The marks awarded should be
converted to 20 Marks for the internal assessment.

2023 REGULATION
DME 86
B Writing CNC Program / Modelling 20
D Editing in the machine or simulator / Interfacing 30
E Finish / Output 10
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 100
Syllabus Contents
Introduction
Study of CNC lathe, milling. - Study of international standard codes:G-Codes and 10

M-Codes. - Format – Dimensioning methods. - Program writing –Turning simulator –
Milling simulator, IS practice – commands menus. - Editing the program in the CNC
machines. - Set the machine and execute the program in the CNC machines
Introduction - 3D printing - modelling software- slicing software -parameters like layer
thickness- orientation and infill on build time
Robotics - introduction - types - configurations - joints - degrees of freedom - industrial
applications - robot analyzer software - features.

2023 REGULATION
DME 87
Practical Exercises 40
CNC Turning Machine Material: M.S / Aluminium / Acrylic fibre / Plastic
1. . Using Linear and Circular interpolation - Create a part program and produce
component in the Machine
2. Using Stock removal cycle – Create a part program for multiple turning operations
and produce component in the Machine.

2023 REGULATION
DME 88
3. Using canned cycle - Create part program for thread cutting,grooving and produce
component.
CNC Milling Machine Material: M.S / Aluminum / acrylic fibre / plastic

4. Using Linear interpolation and Circular interpolation – Create a part program for
grooving and produce component in the Machine.

2023 REGULATION
DME 89
5. Using canned cycle - Create a part program for drilling produce component in the
Machine
6. Using subprogram - Create a part program and produce the component in the
Machine.
7. Model the given engineering component and prepare the .stl file to print using a
3D printer or simulator. - Geneva Wheel

2023 REGULATION
DME 90
8. Model the given engineering component and prepare the .stl file to print using a
3D printer or simulator. - C Clamp with V Block.
9. Position and record the point to point motion of the robot arm or in a simulator.
(5 Positions)
10. Position and record the continuous motion of the robot arm or in a simulator.
(The profile should have Straight line, Circular and inclined line)
Test and Revision 10
Total 60
1. Study and practice the CNC programming for various component machining
2. FIeld visit near by industries based on CNC machines and make report
3. Visit to any three 3D printing industries and make report
4. Study the robot configuration and learn about different application of robot
5. Prepare a presentation about recent applications of 3D printing and robots.

1. P. Radhakrishnan, S. Subramanyam, CAD/CAM/CIM,2 nd edition, New Age International,
2008.
2. Mikell P. Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Roger N Nagel, Industrial robotics technology,
programming, and applications, 2nd edition, McGraw hill Education pvt. ltd.,2012.
3. V. K. Jain, Advanced Machining Processes, 1 st edition , Allied Publications,2010.
● http://www.roboanalyzer.com/

2023 REGULATION
DME 91
Equipment / Facilities required conducting the Practical Course.

1. Personal computer - 30 Nos.
2. CNC Simulation software - Sufficient to the strength
3. CNC Lathe –1 No.
4. CNC Mill –1 No.
5. Laser / Inkjet Printer – 1 No.
6. 3D printer - 1 No or Modelling and slicing software - as per the requirement .
7. Robotic arm - 1 No. or Robotic simulation software - as per the requirement.
8. Consumables - Sufficient quantity
END SEMESTER EXAMINATION – Practical Exam

Note:
● All the exercises should be completed. All the exercise should be given for examinations,
students can select any one exercise by lot ot the question paper supplied by the DOTE
shall be used.
● Practical documents should be prepared, the same should be submitted for the End
Semester Examinations along with the bonafide certificate.
DETAILED ALLOCATION OF MARKS.
B Writing CNC Program / Modelling 20
D Editing in the machine or simulator / Interfacing 30
E Finish / Output 10
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 100

2023 REGULATION
DME 92
1020234440 L T P C
SENSORS AND ACTUATORS
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
Sensors are needed to measure (sense) unknown signals and parameters of an engineering
system and its environment. Essentially, sensors are needed to monitor and learn about the
system. Sensor is a device that when exposed to a physical phenomenon (temperature,
displacement, force, etc.) produces a proportional output signal (electrical, mechanical,
magnetic, etc.). Actuators are needed to drive a plant. A diploma holder when employed in
automated industrial process controls will be required to know the basics of Sensors and
Actuators.
Course Objectives:
● Explain the types and working of various types of sensors.
● Practice with temperature sensor, proximity sensor, LVDT and Light Sensors.
● Describe the functions of Linear and Rotary Electrical actuators.
● Describe the functions of Electrical, Pneumatic and Hydraulic actuators.
● Practice with interfacing of Arduino compatible sensors and actuator with Arduino.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Describe the working of Resistive, Inductive, Temperature and Light Sensors.
CO2: Interface and observe the behaviour of Proximity sensors with relay and buzzer.
CO3: Construct the circuit and observe the behaviour of the solid state electronic
actuator.
CO4: Describe the working of Electrical, Pneumatic and Hydraulic actuators.
CO5: Demonstrate the applications of Arduino compatible sensors and actuators.
Pre-requisites:
Applied Physics, Basic Electrical and Mechanical Engineering.

2023 REGULATION
DME 93
1020234440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 1 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 2 2
curiosity to learn.
projects.
ensure that learning is outcome and employability based.
as possible.

2023 REGULATION
DME 94
1020234440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)

Portion Cycle I Cycle II All All

All Units
Experiments Experiments Experiments Experiments
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Marks.

2023 REGULATION
DME 95
1020234440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

next experiment.
file with documents. The student should draw the Circuit Diagram and take readings, do
calculations and prepare the Graph/Result manually in the documents.

TOTAL 50
Total Marks 60
Cycle I: 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
Cycle II: 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10.

2023 REGULATION
DME 96
1020234440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks

F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

2023 REGULATION
DME 97
1020234440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus Contents
Theory Portion
UNIT I: SENSORS Period
Resistance, Inductance and Capacitive Sensors: Definition – Classification of 8

Sensors/Transducers - Elements of measurement system – Primary Sensing
Elements (Bellows, Bourdon Tube) - Potentiometer - Linear potentiometer – Rotary
potentiometer - Load Cell – Strain Gauge Load Cell - Linear Variable Differential
Transformer (LVDT) – Rotary - Variable Differential Transformer (RVDT) – DC
Tachogenerator – AC Tachogenerator - Principles of Capacitive Sensors – Hall
effect sensor.
Temperature Sensors: Thermocouple – Resistance Temperature Detector
–Thermistor - Infrared (IR) thermometer.
Proximity Sensors: Inductive Proximity Sensor – Capacitive Proximity Sensor -
Photoelectric Proximity Sensor - Ultrasonic Proximity Sensor - Basic Reed Switch.
Light Sensor: Photodiode – Phototransistor – Photoconductive Cell - Photovoltaic
Cells - Bar Code Reader - Shaft Encoders - Encoder Types (Incremental Encoder,
Absolute Encoder) - Optical Shaft Encoder - Photoelectric Tachometer.
Arduino Compatible Sensor : Voltage Sensor – Current Sensor – LM35 Sensor -
Ultrasonic Sensor - Force Sensor – Moisture Sensor – Gas Sensor.
1. TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 4
i) Construct a circuit to measure Temperature of Liquid using
Thermistor or Thermocouple or RTD.
ii) Also find the graphical relationship between input and output.

2023 REGULATION
DME 98
1020234440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
2. BEHAVIOUR OF PROXIMITY SENSORS 4

i) Observe the behaviour of Inductive proximity sensor and
Capacitive Proximity sensor for different material samples.
ii) Interface relay and buzzer with sensors to test the output.
3. LVDT 4
i) Construct a circuit for Measurement of Linear Displacement
using LVDT.
ii) Find the graphical relationship between input and output.
4. PERFORMANCE OF LIGHT SENSOR 4
i) Construct a circuit to obtain the VI characteristics and Response
Characteristics of Photoconductive Cell (LDR).
ii) Construct a circuit to measure the speed of the motor using
Optical Sensor.
5. PERFORMANCE OF ULTRASONIC AND MOISTURE SENSORS 4
i) Interface Ultrasonic sensor with Arduino and measure the
distance of the object.
ii) Interface Moisture sensor with Arduino and measure the moisture
content in the soil.

2023 REGULATION
DME 99
1020234440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
UNIT II: ACTUATORS
Electrical Actuators: General aspects - Switching Devices – Mechanical Switches 7

(Push button – SPST –SPDT – Limit Switch – Solenoid – Relays) – Solid State
switches (Diode, Transistor and Thyristor) – DC Motors – AC Motors – Stepper
Motors – Servo Motors.
Pneumatic Actuators: Introduction – Components of a Pneumatic Systems
–Linear actuators – Construction and working of Single acting and Double acting
cylinders - Rotary Actuators – Air Motors – Types of Air Motors - Piston type Motor,
Vane Motor, Turbine Motor - Applications of Air Motors.
Hydraulic Actuators: Hydraulic Power Supply - Components of Hydraulic system -
Linear actuators - Construction and working of Single acting and Double acting
cylinders – Applications of Hydraulic Cylinders - Some example mechanism driven
by an Hydraulic cylinders - Rotary Actuators – Hydraulic Motors – Advantages and
Applications of Hydraulic Motors.
6. OBSERVE THE BEHAVIOUR OF TRANSISTOR AS A SWITCH 4

i) Construct a circuit to get ON/OFF control on DC Motor using
Push Button, SPST, SPDT and Limit Switch.
ii) Construct a circuit to get ON/OFF control on DC Motor using
Transistor and Relay.
7. FORWARD AND REVERSE CONTROL OF AC MOTOR 4
i) Connect Forward Reverse Control switch to change the direction
of rotation of three phase induction motor.
ii) Demonstrate the Forward and Reverse operation of Motor.

2023 REGULATION
DME 100
1020234440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
iii) Measure the No-Load current in each phase using Tongue tester
(Clamp Meter).
8. PNEUMATIC CIRCUIT FOR DOUBLE ACTING CYLINDER 4
i) Construct a Pneumatic Circuit to control double acting pneumatic
cylinder using 5/2 Solenoid Valve.
ii) Discuss the behaviour of cylinder as linear actuator.
9. OBSERVE THE BEHAVIOUR OF HYDRAULIC MOTOR 4
i) Construct a Hydraulic Circuit to control Hydraulic Motor.
ii) Observe the behaviour of Hydraulic Motor.
10. SERVO MOTOR CONTROL WITH AN ARDUINO 4
i) Construct an Arduino based circuit to sweeps the shaft of servo
motor back and forth across 180 degree.
ii) Interface potentiometer with Arduino and based on its position
get the control of servo motor shaft.
Revision + Test + Practice 20
Total 75

1. Activity 1 : Each student writes and submits the assignment on the topic Basics of
Electricity, Ohm’s Law and Electromagnetism.
2. Activity 2 : Four students can be grouped as a batch and practice an additional experiment
to interface any one of the Arduino compatible sensors (LM35 Temperature sensor, Force
Sensor, Gas Sensor, Voltage Sensor, Humidity Sensor, Rain Sensor, Acceleration sensor,
magnetic sensor, Infrared sensor etc.,) with Arduino and observe the behaviour of sensors.

2023 REGULATION
DME 101
1020234440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Text book for Reference:

1. D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, Multicolour Edition, Second Edition, PHI
Learning Private Limited., 2013.
2. Er. R.K. Rajput, A Textbook of Mechatronics, Fourth Edition, S. Chand & Co., 2016.
3. Jacob Fraden, Handbook of Modern Sensors: Physics, Designs and Application, Fourth
edition, Springer, 2010.
4. Massood Tabib and Azar, Microactuators Electrical, Magnetic, thermal, optical,
mechanical, chemical and smart structures, First edition, Kluwer academic publishers,
Springer, 1997.
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=H9OEAn3Uc2w
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ab9U7NQB1kA

2023 REGULATION
DME 102
1020234440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Quantity
S.No Name of the Equipment’s
Required
Temperature Measurement using Thermocouple / Thermistor / RTD

1. 1 No
Kit
Inductive and Capacitive Proximity Sensors, Relay, Buzzer, Suitable
2. Each 1 No
Power Supply Unit
3. LVDT Trainer Kit 1 No
LDR, MC Ammeter and Voltmeter, 0-30V DC Power Supply Unit, DC
4. Each 1 No
Motor with Optical Sensor set up
Arduino Shield, Arduino compatible Ultrasonic Sensor and Moisture
5. Each 1 No
sensor
Push Button, SPST, SPDT, Limit Switch, Low Voltage DC Motor,
6. Each 1 No
Transistor and Relay
3 Phase Induction Motor, Forward Reverse Control switch and
7. Each 1 No
Clamp Meter
Double acting Pneumatic cylinder, Directional Control Valve,
8. Each 1 No
Compressor
9. Hydraulic Motor, Control Valve, Hydraulic Power Bank Each 1 No
10. Arduino shield, Arduino compatible Servo Motor and Potentiometer Each 1 No
11. Other Consumables As Required

2023 REGULATION
DME 103
1020234440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Note:
DOTE Exam section shall be used. The record of work done by the student should be submitted
with a Bonafide Certificate.

C Connections / Execution 25
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

2023 REGULATION
DME 104
1020234540 L T P C
HEAT POWER ENGINEERING
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction
The purpose of heat power engineering is to give conceptual and principles involving thermal
science, especially focusing on Internal combustion engine, Refrigerator, and compressors.
Through experiments and simulations conducted in the lab, students can validate theoretical
concepts, optimize system performance, testing of various oil properties for using as a fuel and
lubricant in thermal systems and develop innovative solutions for real-world applications. This
practical knowledge enhances their problem-solving skills and prepares them for the challenges
they will face in their careers.
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable the student,
1. To understand the fundamental concepts involved in thermal systems.
2. To analyse the various performance parameters of internal combustion (IC) engines.
3. To analyse the performance of refrigeration cycle/ components.
4. To analyse the performance of the compressor and its volumetric efficiency.
5. To study the properties, complete combustion of fuels and its products.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Interpret the performance indicators of air standard cycles.
CO2: Analyse the performance characteristics of IC engines for various fuels
CO3: Categorise the principles of refrigeration and air conditioning with applications
CO4: Categorise the principles of air compressor applications
CO5: Evaluate the combustion products of fuels by using the exhaust gas analyzer.
Pre-requisites
Basic knowledge of Science, Maths

2023 REGULATION
DME 105
1020234540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 2
CO2 3 2 1 2
CO3 3 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 1 2
CO5 3 2 1 2
● It's recommended that teachers take action to grab students' interest and increase their
confidence in their ability to learn.
● Teachers should use examples from everyday life, realistic scenarios, and real-world
engineering and technological applications to help students understand and appreciate
the many concepts and principles in each subject.
● The demonstration might spark interest in the subject and encourage a scientific
perspective. Every topic should have planned student activities.
● To make sure that learning is outcome-and employability - based, a theory - demonstrate
- practice - activity approach may be used throughout the course.

2023 REGULATION
DME 106
1020234540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)

Portion Cycle I Cycle II

Exercises Exercises
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Marks.

2023 REGULATION
DME 107
1020234540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

next exercise.
file with documents. The observations, readings, calculations and sketches should be
written by the student manually.
A Aim and procedure 10
B Tabular Column / Formulae 10
C Observation / Calculation / Diagram 30
TOTAL 50
60
Cycle 1: Exercise 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.

Cycle 2: Exercise 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10.

2023 REGULATION
DME 108
1020234540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks

D Result / Graph 10
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

2023 REGULATION
DME 109
1020234540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus contents
THEORY
Unit I AIR CYCLES AND IC ENGINES
Basic concept of thermodynamics, definition and units of pressure, temperature, 9
volume, density, specific heat, energy, work, force, power, heat, enthalpy, and
entropy. Laws of perfect gases and its Equation. Thermodynamic processes such
as constant volume, constant pressure, constant temperature, adiabatic,
polytropic. (simple problems)
Air cycles - air standard efficiency - reversible and irreversible processes - Carnot
cycle - Otto cycle - Diesel cycle. Illustration of above cycles on pressure, volume,
temperature, and entropy scale- working and calculation of efficiency. (simple
problems )
Internal combustion engines – classification - comparison of four stroke and two
stroke engines.
Testing of IC engines– indicated power – brake power – friction power –
efficiencies of I.C. engines – indicated thermal, brake thermal, mechanical, and
relative efficiencies – Specific fuel consumption.
1 Determine the flash and fire point of the lubricating oil by using Open 5
cup apparatus and Closed cup apparatus and compare the value for the
given sample.
2 Draw the valve timing diagram of single cylinder four stroke petrol 5
engines.
3 Draw the valve timing diagram of single cylinder four stroke diesel 5
engines.
4 Draw the port timing diagram of a single cylinder two stroke Petrol 5
Engine.

2023 REGULATION
DME 110
1020234540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
5 Load test (Performance test) on Four Stroke Diesel Engine or Four 5

Stroke Petrol Engine.
6 Morse test on multi-cylinder petrol engine. 5
7 Heat balance test on Four Stroke Diesel or Petrol Engine. 5
Unit II AIR COMPRESSOR , REFRIGERATION AND FUELS
Air Compressor and its functions, Single stage & Multi stage reciprocating air 6
compressor - Refrigeration: Introduction to refrigeration, refrigerant, refrigeration
effects. COP, TON of refrigeration. Vapor compression refrigeration (VCR) system.
Classifications of fuels– requirements of a good fuel – stoichiometric air required
for complete combustion of fuels –products of combustion – analysis of exhaust
gases - calorific value of fuels – higher and lower calorific values.
8 Volumetric efficiency of Air Compressor. 5
9 Determination of COP of Refrigeration System. 5
10 Find the Percentage of CO, CO2, O2, and amount of HC, NOx using 5
Exhaust gas analyser.
Test + Revision 10
TOTAL HOURS 75
List of Students Activity to be performed:

● Dismantling and assembling a reciprocating and rotary compressor .
● Study the types of Refrigerants and their properties.
● Study the working principle of two stroke and four stroke engines.
● Study the Valve Timing / Port Timing of multi cylinder engine.

2023 REGULATION
DME 111
1020234540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Textbook for reference

1. R. K. Rajput, Thermal Engineering, 11th Edition, Laxmi publications Pvt Ltd , New Delhi,
2020.
2. R.S. Khurmi, J. K. Gupta, A Textbook of Thermal Engineering, S. Chand Publishing, 2019.
3. R. K. Rajput , A Text Book of Automobile Engineering, Laxmi publications Pvt Ltd, New
Delhi, 2012.
4. P. K. Nag, Basic And Applied Thermodynamics 2/E, McGraw-Hill Education (India) Pvt
Limited, 2010.
Website links for reference

● NPTEL (Website): https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103316/
● NPTEL (Website): https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103262/

2023 REGULATION
DME 112
1020234540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
List of Equipments
S.No. Name of Equipments Quantity
1. Open cup apparatus 1 No.
2. Closed cup apparatus 1 No.
Four stroke petrol engine cut section model for valve timing
3. 1 No.
diagram.
Four stroke diesel engine cut section model for valve timing
4. 1 No.
diagram.
5. Two stroke petrol cut section model for port timing diagram. 1 No.
6. Four Stroke Petrol Engine or Diesel Engine Test rig. 1 No.
7. Multi- Cylinder Petrol or Diesel Engine Test rig. 1 No.
8. Air Compressor Test rig. 1 No.
9. Refrigeration Test rig. 1 No.
10. Exhaust Gas Analyzer. 1 No.
Reciprocating and Rotary Air compressor for dismantling and

11. 1 No.
assembling

2023 REGULATION
DME 113
1020234540 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Note: All the exercises should be given in the question paper and students are allowed to select
by a lot or the question paper allotted from the DOTE shall be used.
D Result / Graph 10
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

2023 REGULATION
DME 114
1020234640 L T P C
METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction
The progress in metrology and measurements is highly necessary and has led to improvements
in product quality, enhanced scientific research capabilities, and increased efficiency in diverse
industries including manufacturing, automobile, aerospace, and quality control. It encompasses
various disciplines and techniques used to ensure the accuracy, precision, and reliability of
measurements. Therefore, the study of metrology and measurements is essential for
maintaining uniformity and excellence across various fields, including manufacturing and
scientific research.
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to prepare the student,
● To impart knowledge about different measuring instruments.
● To provide fundamental principles of metrology and understand the significance of
accurate measurements.
● To acquire knowledge regarding the measurement of linear and angular dimensions of
components and assemblies.
● To impart knowledge on advanced measurement techniques for quality control in
manufacturing industries
Course Outcomes
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to,
CO1: Classify the measuring instruments based on their applications.
CO2: Select appropriate instrument for linear dimensions
CO3: Select appropriate instrument for angular dimensions
CO4: Explain various instruments used in measuring screw threads and gears
CO5: Discuss about the applications of CMM and LASER technology in metrology
Pre-requisites
Knowledge of basic measuring instruments.

REGULATION 2023
DME 115
1020234640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 2 2
CO2 2 2
CO3 2 2
CO4 2 2
CO5 2 2
to learn.
projects.
possible.

REGULATION 2023
DME 116
1020234640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)


Exercises Exercises
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 117
1020234640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

exercise.
file with documents. The observations, readings, calculations and sketches should be
written by the student manually in the document.
A Procedure / Preparation 10
B Observation / Dimensions 20
C Accuracy 20
TOTAL 50
60
Cycle - I Exercise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.

Cycle - II Exercise 7, 8, 9 and 10.

REGULATION 2023
DME 118
1020234640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
C Accuracy 20
D Result 10
E Viva voce 10
F Written test 30
100

REGULATION 2023
DME 119
1020234640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus contents
THEORY
UNIT I: LINEAR MEASUREMENTS AND COMPARATORS Periods
Basics of Metrology 8
Scope of Metrology, basic units, important terminology, Measurement – Need,
Process, Role in quality control; Factors affecting measurement - SWIPE;
international standardization, the bureau of Indian standards - important elements
of measurements - methods of measurements.
Precision - accuracy - definition - factors affecting the accuracy of the measuring
system - general rules for accurate measurements - precautions for use of
instruments so as to avoid in accuracy in measurements - reliability – definition,
Measurement uncertainty, Measurement system analysis, Compare systematic
error and random error, Selection of measuring instruments - Calibration of
measuring instruments.
Linear Measurements
Linear Measuring Instruments – Vernier caliper, Micrometer, Vernier height gauge,
Depth Micrometer, bore gauge, Telescoping gauge; Gauge blocks – Use and
precautions, possible sources of errors in micrometers – slip gauges -
requirements – Indian standard – care and use.
Comparator
Comparators – Working and advantages - Types - Mechanical and Pneumatic
Comparators.
Ex. No Name of the Experiment Hours
1 VERNIER CALIPER
i) Measure the dimensions of ground MS flat/Cylindrical bush using 5
Vernier Caliper.
ii) Compare the results with Digital Vernier Caliper.

REGULATION 2023
DME 120
1020234640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
2 OUTSIDE MICROMETER 5
i) Measure the diameter of a wire using micrometer
ii) Compare the results with a digital Outside micrometer.
3 INSIDE MICROMETER 5
i) Measure the inside diameter of the bore of a bush cylindrical
component using Inside micrometer
ii) Compare the results with digital inside micrometer.
4 SLIP GAUGES 5
Measure the thickness of ground MS plates using slip gauges.
5 VERNIER HEIGHT GAUGE
Measure the height of gauge blocks or parallel bars using vernier height 5
gauge.
6 MECHANICAL COMPARATOR 5
Find out the measurement of a given component and Compare with a
standard component using a mechanical comparator and slip gauge.
THEORY
UNIT II: ANGULAR MEASUREMENTS, CMM, SURFACE & ADVANCED METROLOGY
Angular Measurements: Angular measuring instruments – Bevel protractor, Angle 7
gauges, Precision level, Sine bar, Autocollimator. Opto-mechanical measurements
using a measuring microscope and Profile projector. Measurement of Screw threads
– Single element measurements – Pitch Diameter, Lead, Pitch. Measurement of
Gears – purpose – Analytical measurement – Runout, Pitch variation, Tooth profile,
Tooth thickness, Lead.
Coordinating measuring Machine: Basic concept of CMM – Types of CMM –
Constructional features – Probes – Accessories – Software – Applications.
Advanced Metrology: Basic concepts of lasers - types of lasers - laser and LED
based distance measuring instruments.

REGULATION 2023
DME 121
1020234640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Ex. No. Name of the Experiment
7 UNIVERSAL BEVEL PROTRACTOR 5
Measure the angle of a V-block/Taper Shank of Drill/ Dovetail using
universal bevel protractor.
8 SINE BAR 5
Measure the angle of the machined surface using sine bar with slip
gauges.
9 SCREW THREAD MICROMETER 5
Measure the geometrical dimensions of V-Thread using screw thread
micrometer.
10 GEAR TOOTH VERNIER CALIPER 5
Measure the geometrical dimensions of spur gear using gear tooth
vernier caliper.
Activity + Revision + Assessment Test 10
Total 75
Suggested List of Student Activity

1. Each student writes and submits the assignment on the topic of Methods of
measurements, Precautions to avoid inaccuracy in measurements, Selection and
Calibration of measuring instruments.
2. Four students can be grouped as a batch to measure the various dimensions of taper
shank drill bit and spur gear and submit the activity report. The activity report should
have the diagram and various dimensions of the taper shank drill bit and spur gear.
3. Visit Industry to study the working of the CMM. Prepare a report.
4. Visit Industry to study the working of the Profile Projector. Prepare a report.
5. Study the various types of Comparator. Prepare a report.

REGULATION 2023
DME 122
1020234640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Text and Reference books.

1. R. K. Jain, Engineering Metrology, 22 nd Edition, Khanna Publishers, 2022.
2. N. V. Raghavendra and L. Krishnamurthy, Engineering Metrology and Measurements,
Oxford University Press India, 2013.
3. R. K. Rajput, Engineering Metrology and Instrumentation, S.K. Kataria & Sons, 2nd
Edition, 2013.
4. Samir Mekid, Metrology and Instrumentation: Practical Applications for Engineering and
Manufacturing, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2021.
5. Anand K. Bewoor & Vinay A. Kulkarni, Metrology & measurement, Tata
McGraw-Hill, 2009.
6. Rega Rajendra, Principles of Engineering Metrology, Jaico Publishing House, 2008.
Web-based/Online Resources
END SEMESTER EXAMINATIONS – PRACTICAL EXAM.

C Accuracy 20
D Result 10
E Viva voce 10
F Written test 30
100

REGULATION 2023
DME 123
1020234640 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
S. No Name of the Equipment Quantity required

1 Vernier Caliper 2 nos
2 Digital Vernier Caliper 2 nos
3 Outside Micrometer 2 nos
4 Digital Outside Micrometer 2 nos
5 Inside Micrometer 2 nos
6 Digital Inside Micrometer 2 nos
7 Slip Gauges 2 nos
8 Vernier Height Gauge 1 no
9 Surface Plate 2 nos
10 Dial Indicator (0-10) 2 nos
11 Universal Bevel Protractor 2 nos
12 Sine Bar with Slip gauges 2 nos
13 Screw Thread Micrometer 2 nos
14 Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper 1 no
15 Mechanical Comparator 1 No.
Consumable Sufficient Quantity

REGULATION 2023
DME 124
1020235110 L T P C
ELEMENTS OF MACHINE DESIGN
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Introduction
Design plays a major role in developing engineering and technology. Machine Design is the creation
of new and better machines and improving the existing ones. Elements Design is the process of
selection of the material, shape, size and arrangement of mechanical elements so that the machine
will perform its task. A process which includes design of all parts of a machine subjected to carry the
forces without failure by transforming other forms of energy into mechanical energy.
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable the student to apply the various design procedures,
principles and various stresses in the elements of machine design.
1. To understand and apply to Solve the problems of various types of failures, and design of
joints.
2. To apply the Design procedure of keys and coupling.
3. To apply the Design procedure of belt drives and selection of belt drives.
4. To apply the design procedure of supported rotating element.
5. To understand the concept of Computer Aided Design.
Course Outcome
After successful completion of this course, the students can able to
CO1: Calculate the dimensions of shaft and key for a given application
CO2: Design a coupling for a given application.
CO3:Select proper belt drive from manufacturers catalogue for power transmission under
specified condition
CO4: Design journal bearing and spur gear based on a given applications
CO5: Practice the CAD activities in various stages of product design
Prerequisites
Mathematics, Engineering Mechanics, Strength of Materials, and Engineering Drawing.

2023 REGULATION
DME 125
1020235110 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3

Examination
CA1 CA2 CA3 CA4
(60 marks)
Quiz
Written test
Mode (Another Two
units)
Offline)
Exam Marks 40 40 60 100 100

Converted
15 15 5 20 60
to
Marks 15 5 20 60
Tentative
Schedule
CA1 and CA2: Assessment written test should be conducted for 40 Marks for two units. The marks
scored will be converted to 15 Marks. Best of one will be considered for the internal assessment of
15 Marks.
Answer Two questions (2 X 20 Marks = 40 Marks).
Four questions will be asked, students should write Two questions. Each unit Two questions can be
asked. Each question may have subdivisions. Maximum two subdivisions shall be permitted.
CA3: 60 MCQ can be asked by covering the entire portion. It may be conducted by Online / Offline.
The answer scripts of every student (online / offline) for this assessment should be kept for records
and future verification. The marks scored should be converted to 5 marks for the internal
assessment.

2023 REGULATION
DME 126
1020235110 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
CA4: Model examination should be conducted as per the end semester question pattern. The marks
should be converted to 20 marks for the internal assessment.
Question Pattern:
Answer Five questions by selecting One question from each unit. Each question carries 20 marks
each.
Two questions will be asked from every unit, students should write any One question. The question
may have two subdivisions only.
CO-PO Mapping
CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7
CO1 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 3

2023 REGULATION
DME 127
1020235110 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Syllabus Contents.
THEORY
Unit I Fundamentals of Design and Stresses
Introduction about Component Design. Engineering materials - Factors affecting 8

selection of materials BIS designation of Ferrous materials – Preferred number -
Factor of safety and allowable stress - Stresses: Tension, Compression, Shear,
bearing pressure intensity, crushing, bending and torsion- Problem. Composite
Material, types, property and applications.
Creep strain and Creep Curve- Fatigue, S-N curve, Endurance Limit Stress
Concentration. Theories of Elastic Failures Principal normal stress theory,
Maximum shear stress theory & Maximum distortion energy theory.
Unit II Design Of Coupling and Keys
Couplings, Requirements of good couplings, types – design of rigid protected type 9

flange couplings marine coupling pin type flexible couplings (description only).
Keys - Types of keys - design of sunk keys only - Effect of keyways on shaft -
problems.
Unit III Design of Flat Belts and V-Belts
Flat Belts: Types of belts - materials for belt - types of belt drives - Speed ratio - 10
effect of slip - length of flat belts -Tension Ratio. centrifugal tension - power
transmitted - condition for maximum power - transmission - Initial Tension -
Design procedure of flat belts - Design of flat belt based on manufacturer’s data
only – problems.
V-belt drive - comparison with flat belt drive - designation of V belts - length of belt
- power transmitted - Design of V-belt using manufacturer’s data only - Problem.

2023 REGULATION
DME 128
1020235110 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Unit IV Design of Bearings
Bearings: Classifications of bearings - sliding contact and rolling contact bearings 9

- radial and thrust bearings - roller bearing – types.
Designation of ball bearings - materials used for bearings - design of journal
bearings heat generated, heat dissipated, cooling oil requirement - Problems.
Design of journal bearings problems, design based on approved date book only.
(No problem from dimensionless parameters)
Unit V Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Geometric Modelling
CAD – Roles of CAD in design - Development and uses – applications, advantages, 9

Product life cycle.
Design process: Sequential Engineering – Concurrent Engineering, Value
Engineering, Lean Manufacturing System.
Geometric modelling, Solid modelling representation in CAD, Solid modelling
approaches, Constructive Solid Geometry, Boundary representation - Comparison -
Finite Element analysis - Prototype. (New Product Development technique)
NOTE: Printed approved Design Data Books are permitted for all examinations / Approved data
books abstract copy attested by the HOD and Principal can be used.
Suggested list of Students Activity

1. Online MCQ shall be conducted for each unit.
2. Presentation and Seminar can be conducted.
3. Seminars about the product development process can be given.
4. Simulation practices of design and analysis can be given.

2023 REGULATION
DME 129
1020235110 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Reference Books
1. Machine Design, Pandya & Shah,20th Edn. 2015, Charotar Publishing House.
2. Machine Design, T. V. Sundararajamoorthy & N. Shanmugam, Revised Edition
June-2018–Anuradha Publications.
3. Design Data Book – by PSG College of Technology, DPV Printers.
4. A textbook of Machine Design, R.S. Khurmi & J.K.Gupta, Edn. 18,2005, S. Chand Publishing.
5. Design of Machine Elements, Bandari, 4th Edition 2016, Tata McGraw-Hill , New Delhi.
6. Mechanics of Composite Materials, Second Edition, 2006 Autar K. Kaw, Taylor & Francis
Group.
7. “R.Radhakrishnan, and S.Subramanian, “CAD/CAM/CIM”2018, New Age International Pvt
Limited.
Web Reference
● https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105125/
END SEMESTER QUESTION PATTERN – Theory Exam,

DURATION: 3 Hrs. Max. Marks : 100
Question Pattern:
Answer Five questions by selecting One question from each unit. Each question carries 20 marks
each. Printed Design Data Book and Approved abstract of the Data Book can be permitted.
Instruction to Question setters.

Two questions will be asked from every unit, students should write any One question. The question
may have two subdivisions only.

2023 REGULATION
DME 130
1020235230 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING AND L T P C
PRACTICUM MANAGEMENT 3 0 2 4
Introduction
In the Indian Economy, Industries and enterprises always find a prominent place. After
globalization, the government of India has announced a liberalization policy of starting an
enterprise which resulted in the mushroom growth of industries. The present day students
should be trained not only in manufacturing processes but also in managing activities of
industries. Training must be imparted to students not only to shape them as technicians but
also as good managers. The knowledge about plant, safety, work study techniques, personnel
management and financial management will definitely mould the students as managers to suit
the industries. Due to the presence of such personalities the industries will leap for better
prosperity and development.
Course Objectives
● To study the different types of layout.
● To study the safety aspects and its impacts on an organization.
● To study different work measurement techniques.
● To study the staff selection procedure and training of them.
● To study capital and resources of capital.
● To study inventory control systems.
● To study engineering ethics and human values.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Select the plant layout by incorporating plant safety procedure
CO2: Apply work study principles as a tool for plant management
CO3: Describe the principles of management used in industries
CO4: Apply various inventory control techniques in material management
CO5: Describe modern management techniques used in shop floor
.

2023 REGULATION
DME 131
Pre-requisites
Basic knowledge of industries and its practices (through Industrial Visits)
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3
CO2 3 2
CO3 3
CO4 3 2
CO5 3
● Conduct group discussions on plant safety
● Encourage students to know about the share market details(BSE,NSE)
● Use powerpoint presentations.

2023 REGULATION
DME 132
Semester
(60 marks)
Written
Examination
Mode (Complete
Theory
Portions)
Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100

Converted
10 10 15 15 60
to
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:

2023 REGULATION
DME 133

Each exercise procedure and steps should be completed on the day of practice. The
same shall be evaluated for 10 marks on the day or next day of practice before
file with documents. The reading and calculations and graph should be written by the
student manually in the document.

A Aim 10
B Procedure / Steps 20
C Explanation 20
D Report 10
F Viva Voce 10
Total 100

2023 REGULATION
DME 134
assessment.
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents.
THEORY PORTION
Unit I PLANT ENGINEERING AND PLANT SAFETY
Plant Engineering : Plant – Selection of site of industry – Plant layout – types – 9
process, product and fixed position – Plant maintenance – importance – Break
down maintenance, preventive maintenance and scheduled maintenance.
Plant Safety: Importance – Industrial safety and procedure-Improper handling-
accident - causes and cost of an accident - accident proneness - prevention of
accidents-Settlement of industrial disputes - Indian Factories Act 1948 and its
provisions related to health, welfare and safety.
Unit II METHOD STUDY AND WORK MEASUREMENT
Method Study: Definition – Ergonomics-Basic procedure for conduct of method 9
study – Tools used – Operation process chart, Flow process chart, two handed
process chart- Man machine chart.
Work Measurement: Definition – Basic procedure in making a time study – Cycle
time and Total Time-Techniques of work measurement - Ratio delay study,
Synthesis from standard data, analytical estimating, Predetermined Motion Time
System(PMTS).

2023 REGULATION
DME 135
Unit III PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

Principles of Management: Definition of management – Administration - 9
Organization – F.W. Taylor’s and Henry Fayol’s Principles of Management -
Selection procedure – Training of workers – Apprentice training – On the job
training and vestibule school training - wages and salary administration –
Components of wages.
Unit IV FINANCIAL AND MATERIAL MANAGEMENT
Financial Management: Resources of capital – shares-preference and equity 9
shares – debentures-Factory costing – direct cost – indirect cost – Factory
overhead – Selling price of a product – Profit –. Depreciation – Causes –Methods -
Straight line, sinking fund and percentage on diminishing value method
Material Management: Objectives of good stock control system – ABC analysis of
inventory – Procurement and consumption cycle – Minimum Stock, Lead Time,
Reorder Level - Economic order quantity – problems –Supply chain Management -
Purchasing Procedure- Bin card.
Unit V MODERN MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES
5S concept - Just in Time(JIT) - Kaizen - ERP - Kanban - SQC - SPC - PPC - TPM - 9
TQM - Quality tools - 7QC Tools - PDCA Cycle
Six sigma - Industry 4.0 – Internet of things(IoT) - Cloud computing - AI and
Machine Learning-Management Information System(MIS).
Theory Portions 45
Practical 20
Practice + Revision + Test 10
Total 75

2023 REGULATION
DME 136
PRACTICAL EXERCISES 20 Periods

1. TO STUDY AND PREPARE OPERATION PROCESS CHART (OPC)FOR GIVEN ASSEMBLY
AND SITUATION.
Assemble a Pedestal Electric Fan With Following Parts
● Base,
● pedestal ,
● motor head ,
● switch set,
● rear guard,
● front guard,
● guard ring lock,
● blade,
● screws
2. To Study & Prepare Flow Process Chart (FPC) for the given assembly.
Construct a Flow Process Chart for the following:
● Move bar stock from store to hacksaw Dist. 8 meter
● Cutting of bar stock Time 4 min
● Move to lathe machine Dist. 6-meter
● Turning Process Time 5 min
● Move to milling machine Dist. 7-meter
● Wait for milling machine Time 2 min
● Milling keyway Time 10 min
3. To study & Prepare Man-Machine (Multiple Activity) Chart for the given situation
A chamfering, turning and threading operation is done on a job on lathe machine.
Information of that operation is recorded as under. Show this information on man and
machine chart.
● Carry bar stock from the store. 1 min
● To fix the job in lathe chuck. 2 min
● To carryout manual turning of the job. 1.5 min

2023 REGULATION
DME 137
● To carryout chamfering operation on job 1 min

● To carry out threading operations on the job. 2 min
● To bring the saddle back and rearrange it 0.5 min
● To carry out threading work on the job. 1.5 min
● Inspection of the job. 1 min
● To remove the job from the lathe chuck. 0.5 min
● Carrying completed work piece to store 1 min
4. To study & Calculate coefficient of correlation for time study person using performance
rating technique.
Find actual rating using basic time. Plot a graph of actual rating v/s observed rating.
● At a time one student will walk a distance of 25 feet in a normal way.
● Another student (time-keeper) will note down the time taken for that student to walk.
● All the remaining students will assign ratings to the student walking in the observation
table.
● Time-keeper will give time for that student to all the students.
● Repeat the same procedure changing the time-keeper and the student walking
● Find basic time using observations.
5. To study & Calculate standard time for the given job.
𝑩𝒂𝒔𝒊𝒄 𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒆 = 𝑶𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒆𝒅 𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒆 × 𝑹𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈 𝒐𝒇 𝒘𝒐𝒓𝒌𝒆𝒓 /𝑺𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒓𝒅 𝑹𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈

Work Content= Basic time + Relaxation & Incidental Allowances
Standard Time= Work Content + Other Allowances

2023 REGULATION
DME 138
6. To Draw Two Handed Process Chart For Bolt, Washer & Nut Assembly
To draw left and right hand process charts and to conduct time study for the bolt, washer & nut
assembly of present and improved methods.
𝐴𝑉𝐸𝑅𝐴𝐺𝐸 𝑇𝐼𝑀𝐸 𝑇𝐴𝐾𝐸𝑁 𝐹𝑂𝑅 𝐴𝑁 𝐴𝑆𝑆𝐸𝑀𝐵𝐿𝑌 𝑂𝐿𝐷 𝑀𝐸𝑇𝐻𝑂𝐷−𝐴𝑉𝐸𝑅𝐴𝐺𝐸 𝑇𝐼𝑀𝐸 𝑇𝐴𝐾𝐸𝑁 𝐹𝑂𝑅 𝐴𝑁 𝐴𝑆𝑆𝐸𝑀𝐵𝐿𝑌 𝑁𝐸𝑊 𝑀𝐸𝑇𝐻𝑂𝐷
% 𝑇𝐼𝑀𝐸 𝑆𝐴𝑉𝐸𝐷 = 𝐴𝑉𝐸𝑅𝐴𝐺𝐸 𝑇𝐼𝑀𝐸 𝑇𝐴𝐾𝐸𝑁 𝐹𝑂𝑅 𝐴𝑁 𝐴𝑆𝑆𝐸𝑀𝐵𝐿𝑌 𝑂𝐿𝐷 𝑀𝐸𝑇𝐻𝑂𝐷
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
1. Stop watch
2. Brass spindles
3. Nylon washers
4. Lock washers
5. Hexagonal nuts
Suggested List of Students Activity

Presentation/seminars by the students on modern management techniques.
Explore various plants during industrial visits.
Find the selling price of a product using ladder diagrams.
Find depreciation values of vehicles.
Find standard time for a particular job (in lathe) using stop watch time study methods.
Reference
1. S.C.Sharma & T.R. Banga, Industrial Engineering and Management, 2nd Edition, Khanna
Book Publishing, 2022.
2. S.Chand, Industrial Engineering and Production Management, 3rd Edition, S. Chand
Publishing, 2018.
3. M.P.Poonia & S.C.Sharma, Industrial Safety and Maintenance Management,1 st Edition,
Khanna Publishing, 2021.

2023 REGULATION
DME 139
Web-based Online Resources

● https://youtu.be/jFDWlKayrTc?si=oe4glWk9Qb18wxUx
● https://youtu.be/yhywrCChJBQ?si=7eXkcTyAsH8TNP6x



2023 REGULATION
DME 140
1020235331 L T P C
Modern QC Tools
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Introduction
Quality Control (QC) is a critical aspect of manufacturing and service industries, ensuring that
products and services meet predefined standards and customer expectations. Over the years,
QC has evolved significantly, incorporating advanced techniques and tools to improve efficiency,
accuracy, and reliability. Modern Quality Control tools are a combination of traditional
methodologies and innovative technologies designed to enhance the quality management
process.
Course Objectives
The objectives of this course is enable the student to
● Explain the basic Quality concepts and its objectives.
● Explain the Total Quality Management Principles.
● To learn the concept and properties of various Continuous improvement methods.
● Appreciate the benefits of implementing 5S , Kaizen concepts.
● Collect and classify various data.
● Determine the process capability of a manufacturing process through the construction
of various control charts for variables and attributes.
● Knowledge and practice on construction of Quality and Management tools.
Course Outcomes
On successful completion of this course, the student able to
CO1: Explain the Quality concepts and techniques used in industries.
CO2: Acquire knowledge about various continuous improvement methods and its
implementation techniques.
CO3: Interpret types of data on various control charts for improving the process.
CO4: Create QC charts using Seven tools of quality for problem solving and continuous
improvement processes.
CO5: Adopt the seven management tools to identify improvement opportunities and develop
implementation plans.

2023 REGULATION
DME 141
1020235331 L T P C
Modern QC Tools
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Pre-requisites
Knowledge of basic Science
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 1 - 1 1 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1
CO3 2 2 1 2 1 1 1
CO4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Active Learning: Activities for active learning can include think-pair-share strategies as well as
kin-esthetic learning environment.Teachers can start a discussion to make sure students take
ownership over their own participation and talk through new ideas and skills with peers.
Teachers guide students as they construct their own knowledge and understanding.
Hands-on-Training: Conduct demonstrations and hands on training is all about applying the
knowledge you have learned in training into practice.
Real time Learning: Instructors shall encourage the students to implement the techniques in
their own place / Lab through the Industry-Institute interactions.

2023 REGULATION
DME 142
1020235331 L T P C
Modern QC Tools
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Written
Examination
Mode (Complete
Theory
Portions)
Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100

Converted
10 10 15 15 60
to
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:

2023 REGULATION
DME 143
1020235331 L T P C
Modern QC Tools
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Each experiment procedure and steps should be completed on the day of practice. The
same shall be evaluated for 10 marks on the day or next day of practice before
student manually in the documents.
A Aim / Description 10
B Procedure 20
C Presentation 30
D Practical document (All Practicals) 30
E Viva Voce 10
Total 100

2023 REGULATION
DME 144
1020235331 L T P C
Modern QC Tools
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
assessment.
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents.
Unit I BASICS OF QUALITY CONCEPTS
Definitions of the terms – Inspection, Quality, Quality Planning , Quality Control , 6

Quality Assurance , Quality Management - Dimensions of quality –Basics of Total
Quality– Quality Statements – Strategic Planning – Evolution of Quality Management
– Quality Awards - Introduction to TQM – Pillars of TQM - Characteristics – Basic
concepts – Quality Objectives – Team Building - Barriers to TQM implementation –
Potential benefits of TQM – Quality council – Duties – Responsibilities –Strategic
planning – Factors influencing Quality Costs - Customer Focus – Employee
Involvement
Unit II CONTINUOUS PROCESS IMPROVEMENT
Input / Output process model – Juran Trilogy – PDCA (Deming Wheel) cycle – 5S 6
Concepts – SEIRI, SEITON, SEISO, SEIKETSU and SHITSUKE – needs and objectives
– effective implementation of 5S concepts in an organisation – Kaizen – Gemba
Kaizen – Housekeeping- Quality Circles and the Trade Unions – Reengineering -
Characteristics– Advantages -Criticism of Reengineering-Supplier relationship
Unit III STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL

2023 REGULATION
DME 145
1020235331 L T P C
Modern QC Tools
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Definition – Statistics Data- definition , types and uses. Measures of general 6

Tendency and Dispersion – Mean – Median – Mode –Introduction to measures of
dispersion – Population and Sample – Statistical Process Control and SQC
definition– Process Capability – Sampling -Control Charts and its types –
Comparison of Variable and attributes – X bar and R (Problems) , Attributes – p , np
and c Charts.-Process capability analysis , Definition, steps and its uses.
Unit IV SEVEN TOOLS OF QUALITY
Seven tools of quality (Q-7 tools) – Check sheet – Histogram – Cause and effect 6
diagram - Pareto diagram – Scatter diagram - Flow charts – Control charts -
Construction of above tools , types , Uses and Limitations
Unit V NEW SEVEN MANAGEMENT TOOLS , QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
New seven management tools- Flow and its uses - Affinity diagram – 6
Interrelationship digraph or Relationship diagram - Tree diagram - Matrix
diagram-Prioritization matrices – Process decision program chart – Activity network
diagram. -Construction of above diagrams.
Six sigma –Objectives , Methodology and Benefits – DMAIC -Quality Management
System – ISO 9000 , ISO 14000 Documentation and Implementation – Total
Productive Maintenance –Concepts and Needs.
Theory portions 30
Practical Exercise 20
Revision + Test 10
Total 60
PRACTICAL EXERCISE
1. The Six Sigma process typically follows the DMAIC framework: Define, Measure, Analyze,
Improve, and Control.
2. Write the detailed steps for Lean Manufacturing.
3. Explain the statistical methods to monitor and control a process in SPC.

2023 REGULATION
DME 146
1020235331 L T P C
Modern QC Tools
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
4. Write steps to practice kaizen.

5. Write the procedure to followed for Failure Mode and Effects Analysis (FMEA)
6. Write the step by procedure for the RCA method of problem-solving.
7. Implement 5S on the shop floor and document the details.
8. Create the SPC for the dataset. Use control charts
9. Carry out the Root Cause Analysis (RCA) for the sample
10. Carry out Pareto Analysis. and document the finding.

Quality Audits and Inspections:
● Participating in regular quality audits and inspections of manufacturing processes and
products.
● Learning to use inspection tools and techniques to identify defects and ensure
compliance with quality standards.
● Documenting findings and suggesting improvements to enhance product quality.
Statistical Process Control (SPC) Projects:
● Using SPC tools to monitor and control manufacturing processes.
● Collecting and analyzing data to identify trends, variations, and potential issues.
● Implementing corrective actions based on data analysis to maintain consistent product
quality.
Root Cause Analysis (RCA) and Problem-Solving Activities:
● Engaging in RCA to investigate quality issues and determine their underlying causes.
● Using problem-solving methodologies such as the 5 Whys, Fishbone Diagrams, and
Failure Mode and Effects Analysis (FMEA).
● Developing and implementing action plans to prevent recurrence of quality issues.
Lean Manufacturing and Continuous Improvement Initiatives:
● Participating in Lean Manufacturing activities to eliminate waste and improve efficiency.
● Engaging in continuous improvement projects such as Kaizen events, 5S
implementation, and value stream mapping.

2023 REGULATION
DME 147
1020235331 L T P C
Modern QC Tools
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
● Contributing to the development of standard operating procedures (SOPs) and best

practices to sustain high-quality standards.
Reference
1. "Quality Control and Total Quality Management" by P.L. Jain, Tata McGraw Hill Education.
2. "Total Quality Management" by Dale H. Besterfield, Carol Besterfield-Michna, Glen H.
Besterfield, Mary Besterfield-Sacre, Pearson Education.
3. "Statistical Quality Control" by Eugene L. Grant, Richard S. Leavenworth, Tata McGraw
Hill Education.
4. "Total Quality Management: Principles and Practice" by S. K. Mandal, Vikas Publishing
House.
5. "Six Sigma for Business Excellence: Approach, Tools and Applications" by Hemant
Urdhwareshe, Pearson Education
6. "Quality Assurance and Quality Control in the Analytical Chemical Laboratory: A Practical
Approach, Second Edition" by Piotr Konieczka, Jacek Namieśnik, CRC Press (Distributed
in India).
END SEMESTER EXAMINATION QUESTION PATTERN – Theory Exam



2023 REGULATION
DME 148
1020235332 L T P C
Composite Materials
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Introduction
The field of composite materials has seen significant advancements. The development of new
composite manufacturing techniques has made it feasible to modify the characteristics of
traditional materials to meet specifications. Diploma holders in this course are required to make
use of different composite materials and its manufacturing techniques for different end use
applications. To do this, it is essential to instruct them on the fundamentals of metal matrix
composites, ceramic composites, polymer matrix composites, and more modern advanced
composites, as well as their properties, production methods, and mechanical testing
applications. This course seeks to increase understanding of the several types of composite
materials used in industries, including their types, testing, and applications.
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to prepare the student.
● To understand the types of composite materials, matrix, and reinforcements.
● To equip with knowledge on polymer matrix composites and their production
● To impart knowledge in the manufacturing process and application of various types of
metal matrix composites and ceramic composites.
● To become familiar with the recent developments in polymer composite manufacturing.
● To acquire knowledge of selecting suitable composites for industrial applications and
the response of composite structures subjected to mechanical loading.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Identify the types of composites and the properties of matrix and reinforcements.
CO2: Familiarize the methods used to manufacture polymer matrix composites(PMC) and its
applications in different environments.
CO3: Explain the manufacturing methods, concepts and applications of metal matrix
composite(MMC) and ceramics composites.
CO4: Explain the recent development in composite manufacturing and its applications.
CO5: Apply the concept of composite materials for various applications with the support of
mechanical testing.

2023 REGULATION
DME 149
1020235332 L T P C
Composite Materials
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Pre-requisites
Knowledge about the different materials, Basic Chemistry. Material Science
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 1 1
CO2 3 1 1
CO3 3 1 1
CO4 3 1 1
CO5 3 1 1
Legend: 3-High Correlation, 2-Medium Correlation, 1-Low Correlation1
It is advised that teachers take steps to pique pupils' attention and boost their curiosity to learn.
Implement task-based learning activities where students work on specific tasks or projects.
Incorporate technology tools and resources, such as online platforms, interactive multimedia,
and virtual communication tools, to enhance engagement and provide additional practice
opportunities.
Incorporate formative and summative assessments to gauge student progress and provide
targeted feedback.
Throughout the course, a theory-demonstrate-practice-activity strategy may be used to ensure
that learning is outcome and employability based.
All demonstrations/Hand-on practices may be followed in the real environment as far as
possible.

2023 REGULATION
DME 150
1020235332 L T P C
Composite Materials
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Written
Examination
Mode (Complete
Theory
Portions)
Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100

Converted
10 10 15 15 60
to
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:

2023 REGULATION
DME 151
1020235332 L T P C
Composite Materials
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Each exercise the procedure and steps should be completed on the day of practice.

B Procedure / Tools used / Implementation 20
C Presentation / Report 30
E Viva Voce 10
Total 100

2023 REGULATION
DME 152
1020235332 L T P C
Composite Materials
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
assessment.
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents.
UNIT - I INTRODUCTION TO COMPOSITES

Fundamentals of composites-matrix and reinforcements 6
Matrix- Types of Matrix-Polymer matrix composites(PMC)-Metal Matrix
Composites(MMC)-Ceramics Matrix Composites- Concepts and different
application
Reinforcements-Basic requirements of selection of Reinforcements-Types of
Reinforcements-Whiskers-Glass Fiber-Carbon fibers-Aramid fibers-Ceramic
fibers-properties and applications.
UNIT-II MANUFACTURING OF POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES

Types of PPC manufacturing methods- Hand layup- Spray Layup-Compression 6
Moulding-Sheet forming-Pultrusions-hot press and Autoclave-Filament
Winding-Basic principles, construction and application of PPC.

2023 REGULATION
DME 153
1020235332 L T P C
Composite Materials
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
MANUFACTURING OF METAL MATRIX COMPOSITES (MMC) AND

UNIT-III
CERAMICS MATRIX COMPOSITES (CMC)
MMC manufacturing methods- Casting methods- Gravity and low pressure 6
die-squeeze –spray forming-thixo-moulding- basic principles construction and
applications
CMC manufacturing Methods-Reaction Sintering-Electro Deposition-Spray
forming-infiltration- basic principles construction and applications
UNIT-IV RECENT DEVELOPMENT IN COMPOSITE MANUFACTURING
Advanced composites-self healing composites-micro and 6
nano-composites-biodegradable composites-left handed composites-stiffer than
stiff composites-carbon and carbon composites- process, applications and
limitations.
UNIT-V SELECTION OF COMPOSITES AND MECHANICAL TESTING
Selection of composites for industrial applications- -design and process selection 6
for new applications- Daily usage-automobile sectors- aerospace - Product
examples and applications.
Mechanical testing of Composites-Tensile testing-fatigue testing (three-point bend
test)-Toughness mechanism-basic testing procedure, equipment used and test
applications.
Practical exercise 20
Exercise 1: Material Properties Comparison.
Exercise 2: Composite Material Selection.
Exercise 3: Hand Lay-Up Process.
Exercise 4: Mechanical Testing - Test and analyze the mechanical properties of
composite materials.
Exercise 5: Finite Element Analysis (FEA)
Exercise 6: Micromechanics Analysis - Explore the microscale interactions within
composite materials.
ASSESSMENT TEST AND REVISION 10
TOTAL 60

2023 REGULATION
DME 154
1020235332 L T P C
Composite Materials
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3

1. Visit the composite laboratory.
2. Identify the composite materials used in the Automobile industries.
Reference
1. Suresh, S., Martensen, A., and Needleman, A., “Fundamentals of Metal
MatrixComposites”, Butterworth, Heinemann, 2013.ISBN: 0080523714, 9780080523712.
2. Strong, A. Brent, “Fundamentals of Composites Manufacturing : Materials, Methods and
Applications”, First Edition, Society of Manufacturing Engineers, 2008, ISBN 13:
9780872638549.
3. Ru-Min Wang,Shui-Rong Zheng,Ya-Ping Zheng,”Polymer Matrix Composites and
Tchnology”, First Edition, Woodhead publisher, 2011, ISBN:978-0-85709-221-2.
ONLINE WEB REFERENCES

● https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104168
List of Equipments Required
Computer - 10 Nos.
Kit and setup required for the Composite Lay up.
Software required for the FEA.

2023 REGULATION
DME 155
1020235332 L T P C
Composite Materials
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3



2023 REGULATION
DME 156
1020235333 L T P C
Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Introduction
Industrial refrigeration and air conditioning play a crucial role in various sectors, ensuring the
preservation of perishable goods, maintaining comfortable and safe environments, and
supporting industrial processes that require specific temperature and humidity conditions.
These systems are integral to the efficient operation of many industries, from food and beverage
to pharmaceuticals, chemicals, and manufacturing.
Course Objectives
● To understand the basics of Refrigeration cycles.
● To understand basics of vapour compression and vapour absorption systems.
● To identify components and refrigerants and lubricants of a refrigeration system.
● To understand control strategies for refrigeration systems.
● To understand the basics about air conditioning systems.
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
CO1 Explain the refrigeration and types of Refrigeration cycles
CO2 Describe Vapour Compression and Vapour Absorption System
CO3 Identify the equipments required for the refrigeration system.
CO4 Identify the components for a refrigeration system.
CO5 Explain the working principles of Air-conditioning.
Pre-requisites
Knowledge on Heat, Thermodynamics

2023 REGULATION
DME 157
1020235333 L T P C
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3
CO2 3 1
CO3 3 1
CO4 3
CO5 3
Real time Learning: Instructors encourage the students to implement the techniques in their
own place / Lab through the Industry-Institute interactions.

2023 REGULATION
DME 158
1020235333 L T P C
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Written
Examination
Mode (Complete
Theory
Portions)
Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100

Converted
10 10 15 15 60
to
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:

2023 REGULATION
DME 159
1020235333 L T P C
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
exercise.
This documentation can be written in a separate notebook or a printed manual or a file
with documents. The reading and calculations and graph/ should be written by the
B Procedure / Formulae used / Adjustment 20
C Calculation / Report 20
D Result 10
F Viva Voce 10
Total 100

2023 REGULATION
DME 160
1020235333 L T P C
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
assessment.
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents.
UNIT - I Introduction to Refrigeration

Definition of Refrigeration; Refrigerating effect-unit of refrigeration- Coefficient of 7
performance; Types of Refrigeration-Ice, dry ice, Steam jet, Throttling, Liquid
nitrogen refrigeration; Carnot refrigeration Cycle; Air refrigeration- Bell - Coleman
cycle, PV& TS diagram; Advantage and disadvantages in air refrigeration; Simple
problems
Unit - II Refrigeration systems
Basic Components, Flow diagram of working of Vapour compression cycle; 7
Representation of the vapour compression cycle on P-H, T-S & P-V Diagram;
Expression for Refrigerating effect, work done and power required; Types of Vapour
Compression cycle; Effects of superheating and undercooling, its advantages and
disadvantages; Simple Vapour absorption cycle and its flow diagram; Simple
Electrolux system for domestic units; Comparison of Vapour absorption and vapour
compression system; Simple problems on vapour compression cycle.

2023 REGULATION
DME 161
1020235333 L T P C
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Unit - III Refrigeration equipments

Compressor - types of compressors; Hermetically sealed and Semi hermetically 7
sealed compressor; Condensers - Air Cooled, water cooled, natural and forced
draught cooling system; Advantages and disadvantages of air cooled and water
cooled condensers; Evaporators -natural, convection, forced convection types.
Refrigerants and lubricants: Introduction to refrigerants; Properties of good
refrigerants; Classification of refrigerants by group number and commonly used
refrigerants in practice; Detection of refrigerants leakage; Charging the system with
refrigerant; Lubricants used in refrigeration and their properties.
Unit - IV Refrigerant flow controls
Capillary tube; Automatic Expansion valve; Thermostatic expansion valve; High 7
side and low side float valve; Solenoid valve; Evaporator pressure regulator.
Application of refrigeration: Slow and quick freezing; Cold storage and Frozen
storage; Dairy refrigeration; Ice making industry; Water coolers.
Unit - V Air conditioning
Introduction to Air conditioning; Factors affecting Air conditioning; Psychrometry - 7
Psychrometric chart and its use; Psychometric process - sensible heating and
cooling, Humidifying and dehumidifying; Adiabatic saturation process; Equipments
used in air conditioning cycle; Air conditioning units and plants. Refrigeration and
Air-conditioning tools: Tools used in refrigeration and Air conditioner installation;
Installation procedure; Faults in refrigeration and air conditioning system; Servicing
procedure.
PRACTICAL EXERCISE 20
1. Conduct a test on the cooling tower and determine its efficiency.
2. Determine the cooling capacity and cop of the given vapour compression
refrigeration system
3. Setting and adjustment of the refrigeration components
i) H.P & L.P cut out

2023 REGULATION
DME 162
1020235333 L T P C
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
ii) Thermostatic expansion valve ( 3 turn adjustment of superheat)

iii) Automatic expansion valve
4. Conduct a performance test on a vapour compression refrigeration system
using capillary tube/automatic expansion valve/thermostatic expansion valve and
compare the result
5. Conduct a performance test on a given open type air-conditioning system and
determine the cooling capacity and its c.o.p.
6. Set the winter comfort condition in the desired space using a recirculation type
air-conditioning system and also determine its cooling capacity.
7. Set the summer comfort condition in the desired space using a recirculation
type air-conditioning system and also determine its cooling capacity.
TOTAL 60
Reference
1. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning – Sadhu Singh, Khanna Book Publishing Co., New
Delhi
2. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning – S. Domkundwar, Dhanpat Rai publications.
3. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning – A.S.Sarao & G.S. Gabi, 6th edition, Satya Prakashan
publications, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Principles of Refrigeration – Roy J.Dossat, 5th edition, Pearson Publications, 2001.
5. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning – M.Zakria Baig, Premier/ Radiant Publishing House.
6. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning – C.P Arora, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 2000.

2023 REGULATION
DME 163
1020235333 L T P C
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Equipment required.
1. Cooling tower Kit.
2. Vapour compression refrigeration system Kit.
3. Open type air-conditioning system Kit.
4. Recirculation type air-conditioning system Kit.
5. Required measuring instruments and consumables.



2023 REGULATION
DME 164
1020235334 L T P C
Value Engineering
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Introduction
Value engineering is a systematic, organized approach to providing necessary functions in a
project at the lowest cost. Value engineering promotes the substitution of materials and
methods with less expensive alternatives, without sacrificing functionality. It is focused solely
on the functions of various components and materials, rather than their physical attributes.
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable the student
1. To learn the value engineering methodology.
2. To learn how to manage value in projects.
3. To obtain industry-related experience in applying value engineering methods.
Course Outcome
After successful completion of this course, the students can able to
CO1: Explain the concepts, techniques and applications of value engineering
CO2: Describe job plan of value engineering.
CO3: Illustrate different value engineering techniques and versatility of value
engineering.
CO4: Explain the efforts of value engineering team during the process of value
engineering
CO5: Select suitable recent design tools and operating methods.
Prerequisites
Element of Machine Design, Re engineering, CAD/CAM, Quality Management.

2023 REGULATION
DME 165
1020235334 L T P C
Value Engineering
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
CO-PO Mapping
CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7
CO1 3 1 - 1
CO2 3 1 1 1
CO3 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 1 1 1
CO5 3 1 1

Semester
(60 marks)
Written
Examination
Mode Theory Theory Practical Test (Complete
(Complete
Theory
Portions)
Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100
Converted
10 10 15 15 60
to
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule

2023 REGULATION
DME 166
1020235334 L T P C
Value Engineering
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Note:
exercise.
This documentation can be written in a separate notebook / printed manual / file. The
reading and calculations and graph/ should be written by the student manually. The
evaluated practical document should be submitted for the Practical Test (CA3). The

2023 REGULATION
DME 167
1020235334 L T P C
Value Engineering
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3

B Procedure 20
D Result 10
F Viva Voce 10
Total 100
assessment.
Question Pattern:
marks each.

2023 REGULATION
DME 168
1020235334 L T P C
Value Engineering
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Syllabus Contents
THEORY
Unit I INTRODUCTION OF VALUE ENGINEERING
Value engineering (VE), concepts, advantages, applications, problem recognition, 6
and role in productivity, criteria for comparison, element of choice.
Organization: Level of value engineering in the organization, size and skill of VE
staff, small plant, VE activity, unique and quantitative evaluation of ideas.
Unit II VALUE ENGINEERING JOB PLAN
Introduction, orientation, information phase, speculation phase, analysis phase. 6
Selection and Evaluation of value engineering Projects, Project selection, methods
selection, value standards, application of value engineering methodology
Unit III VALUE ENGINEERING TECHNIQUES
Selecting products and operation for value engineering action, value engineering 6
programme, determining and evaluating function(s) assigning rupee equivalents,
developing alternate means to required functions, Decision making for optimum
alternative, use of decision matrix, queuing theory and Monte Carlo method make
or buy, measuring profits, reporting results, Follow up, Use of advanced technique
like Function Analysis System.
Unit IV VERSATILITY OF VALUE ENGINEERING
Value engineering operation in maintenance and repair activities, value 6
engineering in non-hardware projects. Initiating a value engineering programme:
Introduction, training plan, career development for value engineering specialties.
Unit V VALUE ENGINEERING LEVEL OF EFFORT
Value engineering team, co-coordinator, designer, different services, definitions, 6

construction management contracts, value engineering three case studies.

2023 REGULATION
DME 169
1020235334 L T P C
Value Engineering
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Practical Exercises: Value engineering in mechanical engineering aims to optimize the 20

value of products or processes by improving their functionality, quality, and
cost-effectiveness. Here are some practical exercises tailored for value engineering
mechanical engineering:
Exercise 1: Product Analysis and Cost Breakdown:
Exercise: Select a mechanical product or component (e.g., gearbox, pump, conveyor system)
and conduct a detailed analysis of its design, materials, manufacturing processes, and
associated costs.
Task students with identifying opportunities for cost reduction while maintaining or
improving product performance and reliability.
Encourage students to create cost breakdowns and conduct comparative analyses with
alternative materials, manufacturing methods, or design modifications.
Exercise 2: Function Analysis and Functional Decomposition:
Exercise: Choose a mechanical system or assembly and perform a functional analysis to
identify its primary functions, sub-functions, and interrelationships.
Instruct students to decompose the system into its constituent functions and evaluate each
function's importance in meeting user requirements.
Task students with brainstorming alternative design solutions or modifications that optimize
functionality and eliminate unnecessary features or costs.
Exercise 3: Value Stream Mapping (VSM):
Exercise: Provide students with a manufacturing process map or workflow diagram for a
mechanical component or assembly.
Guide students through the process of creating a value stream map to visualize material and
information flow, process cycle times, and areas of waste or inefficiency.
Encourage students to identify opportunities for streamlining processes, reducing lead
times, and eliminating non-value-added activities to enhance overall value.
Exercise 4: Design for Manufacturability (DFM) Analysis:
Exercise: Assign students a mechanical part or assembly and instruct them to perform a
Design for Manufacturability (DFM) analysis.

2023 REGULATION
DME 170
1020235334 L T P C
Value Engineering
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Have students evaluate the design for factors such as ease of manufacturing, assembly, and
serviceability, as well as opportunities for standardization and part consolidation.
Task students with proposing design modifications or optimizations that simplify
manufacturing processes, reduce material waste, and lower production costs.
Exercise 5: Cost-Benefit Analysis and Trade-off Studies:
Exercise: Present students with a design scenario involving conflicting objectives, such as
reducing product cost versus improving performance.
Guide students through conducting a cost-benefit analysis to quantify the financial impact of
different design alternatives.
Encourage students to perform trade-off studies to assess the trade-offs between cost,
performance, quality, and other key factors, ultimately identifying the most cost-effective
solution.
Exercise 6: Supplier and Material Selection Optimization:
Exercise: Provide students with a list of potential suppliers and materials for a mechanical
component or system.
Instruct students to evaluate supplier capabilities, material properties, lead times, and costs
to identify the most suitable options.
Task students with negotiating with suppliers, exploring bulk purchasing discounts, and
optimizing material selection to minimize procurement costs while ensuring quality and
reliability.
Exercise 7: Life Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA):
Exercise: Assign students a mechanical product or system and instruct them to perform a
Lifecycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) considering all costs incurred throughout its lifecycle,
including acquisition, operation, maintenance, and disposal.
Guide students through quantifying and comparing the total cost of ownership for different
design alternatives, highlighting opportunities for long-term cost savings and value
optimization.
Test + Revision 10
Total 60

2023 REGULATION
DME 171
1020235334 L T P C
Value Engineering
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Suggested list of Students Activity

1. Check the web portal to study the material to identify the role and requirement of Value
Engineering.
2. Periodical quizzes should be conducted on a weekly/fortnightly basic to reinforce the use
of Value Engineering.
3. Students might be asked to visit the mechanical heavy vehicle component manufacturing
industry to find the value engineering implementation.
Reference Books
1. Richard Park, “Value Engineering: A Plan for Invention”, St. Lucie Press, 1999.
2. Del L. Younker, “Value Engineering analysis and methodology”, Marcel Dekker Inc, New
York, 2004.
3. Anil Kumar Mukhopadhyaya, “Value Engineering Mastermind: From concept toValue
Engineering Certification”, SAGE Publications, 2003
4. Anil Kumar Mukhopadhyaya, “Value Engineering: Concepts Techniques and
applications”, SAGE Publications 2010



2023 REGULATION
DME 172
1020235335 L T P C
Green Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Introduction
This course explores present manufacturing practices that produce products without much
pollution. Green manufacturing refers to the regeneration of production methods and the
establishment of ecologically sustainable businesses in the manufacturing industry. In
simple terms, it is the "greening" of manufacturing, whereby employees recycle and reuse
materials, cut down on waste and pollution, use less natural resources, and decrease
emissions during production.
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to prepare the student.
● To introduce the concept of green manufacturing
● To impart knowledge of pollution and measurement of carbon emissions.
● To become familiar with the recent developments in life cycle management.
● To acquire knowledge of selecting suitable materials, methods, and recycling
to make green manufacturing
Course Outcomes
CO1: Explain the importance of tools and Techniques used in green manufacturing
CO2: Familiarize the causes of industrial air pollutants and methods to measure them in
different environments.
CO3: Explain the causes and effects of sound and water pollution.
CO4: Describe the recent developments in life cycle assessment and its implementation.
CO5: Apply the concept of green manufacturing designs to suitable for an environment
Pre-requisites
Knowledge of basic chemistry and metrology.

2023 REGULATION
DME 173
1020235335 L T P C
Green Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 1 - 1
CO2 3 1 - 1
CO3 3 1 - 1
CO4 3 1 - 1
CO5 3 1 - 1
curiosity to learn.
projects.
● Incorporate formative and summative assessments to gauge student progress
and provide targeted feedback.
● Throughout the course, a theory-demonstrate-practice-activity strategy may be
used to ensure that learning is outcome and employability based.
● All demonstrations/Hand-on practices may be followed in the real environment as
far as possible.

2023 REGULATION
DME 174
1020235335 L T P C
Green Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3

Semester
(60 marks)
Written
Examination
Theory Theory (Complete
(Complete
(Any Two (Another Two Practical Test Theory
Mode Theory
Units) Units) (All Exercises) Portions)
Portions)
Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Eight questions will be asked; students should write Five questions.

2023 REGULATION
DME 175
1020235335 L T P C
Green Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
practical test should be conducted as per the scheme of evaluation as below. The marks
awarded for 100 marks will be converted to 15 Marks for the internal mark.
exercise.
This documentation can be written in a separate notebook or a printed manual or a file
with documents. The reading and calculations and graph/ should be written by the
student manually in the documents. The evaluated practical document should be
submitted for the Practical Test (CA3). The mark scored by the students should be
converted to 30 marks. The same should be included as per the allocation in the
practical test.

2023 REGULATION
DME 176
1020235335 L T P C
Green Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3

B Procedure 20
E Viva Voce 10
Total 100
assessment.
Question Pattern:
Answer Ten questions by selecting two questions from each unit. Each question carries 10 marks
each.
Syllabus Contents.
UNIT-I INTRODUCTION TO GREEN MANUFACTURING
THEORY: 6
Green Manufacturing-Definition-History and evolution of green manufacturing.
Factors affecting GM- Environmental Impact of Manufacturing, Strategies for Green
Manufacturing.
Tools & techniques required -Environmental Conscious, Design for Environment;
Design for recycling, Eco friendly Product design methods- Environmental Impact
assessment methods and Standards.

2023 REGULATION
DME 177
1020235335 L T P C
Green Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
PRACTICAL: 3
Exercise 1: Prepare a case study about implementation of green manufacturing.
(The students will have to identify smaller problems from industries / research /
academic organizations pertaining to green manufacturing, analyze and offer
solutions to the problems identified based on the knowledge acquired)
UNIT-II INDUSTRIAL AIR POLLUTANTS
THEORY: 6
Pollutants-Primary and Secondary Pollutants, Automobile Pollutants, Industrial
Pollution, Ambient air quality Standards, Metrological aspects of air Pollution,
Temperature lapse Rates and Stability- wind velocity and Turbulence-Pump
behavior dispersion of air Pollutants.
Measurement of air Pollution-Air pollution sampling-collection of gaseous air
pollutants-collection of particulate pollutants-stock sampling, analysis of air
pollutants-sulfur dioxide-nitrogen dioxide, carbon monoxide, oxidants and ozone.
PRACTICAL: 2
Exercise 2: Determination of CO and CO2 and unburned hydrocarbons
concentration in IC Engine Exhaust.
UNIT-III NOISE & WATER POLLUTION IN INDUSTRIES8
THEORY: 6
Noise pollution in Industries- Frequency and Sound Levels- Effect of human,
Environment and properties, Natural and Androgenic Noise Sources-Measuring
Instruments for frequency and Noise levels- Masking of sound.
Water Pollution-Major pollutants of Water- Contaminants in water, Nitrates,
Fluorides, Detergents, taste and odour, Radioactivity in water- Criteria, for different
impurities in water- Water Quality requirement for industry Uses-Measurement of
water pollution.

2023 REGULATION
DME 178
1020235335 L T P C
Green Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
PRACTICAL: 8
Exercise 3: To estimate Total Dissolved Solids (DO)and PH value of water supplied to
the heat exchanger of any machine.
Exercise 4: Determination of hardness (temporary, permanent and total) of domestic
and industrial waters.
Exercise 5: Experiment on Industrial noise measurement in any production laboratory.
Exercise 6: Free and forced vibration measurement on simple cantilever beams /
Machine members.
UNIT-IV LIFE CYCLE ASSESSMENT
THEORY: 6
Life cycle assessment - Principles of Life cycle assessment; Product Life Cycle
Assessment -Triple bottom line approach; Industrial Ecology- Ecological footprinting -
Future role of LCA - measurement techniques and reporting.
Clean Energy Supply - Green Manufacturing through Clean Energy Supply - Clean
Energy Technologies, Application - Potential of Clean Energy.
Characteristics of Green manufacturing processes - Energy efficiency analysis of
green manufacturing processes - Sustainability analysis and Scope of green
manufacturing centers.
PRACTICAL: 4
Exercise 7: Estimate the Energy requirement of any production machines.
Exercise 8: Machining under different cooling strategy and estimate the Coolant life
management.

2023 REGULATION
DME 179
1020235335 L T P C
Green Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
UNIT-V ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECT OF GREEN MANUFACTURING DESIGN

THEORY: 6
Green Manufacturing Assessment -Concept Models and Various Approaches,
Product Sustainability and Risk/Benefit assessment; Corporate Social Responsibility.
Environmental effects of design -Selection of natural friendly material - Eco design
- Environmental Damage- Material flow and cycles – Material recycling – Emission
less manufacturing- Reduction of toxic emission – design for recycle.
PRACTICAL: 3
Exercise 9: Estimate the power consumption of spindle and feed drive units power
measurement in center lathe / CNC turning or milling machine. (Consider a typical
component and record the power using power sensor under different operation
conditions and evaluate the energy consumption and efficiency of the process)
Test + Revision 10
Total 60

⮚ The students will have to identify a larger problem from industries/research/academic
organizations pertaining to green manufacturing, analyze it, and offer solutions to the
problems identified based on the knowledge acquired.
⮚ The students have to create a graphical diagram that shows the environmental challenges
in the manufacturing shop or laboratory tool room. Suggest the remedial measure.
⮚ Students must keep track of the percentage of air pollutants in the classroom. Create a
comparison chart for a month.
Reference
● Gradel.T.E. and B.R. Allenby – Industrial Ecology – Prentice Hall – 2010
● World Commission on Environment and Development (WCED), Our Common Future, Oxford
University Press 2005.

2023 REGULATION
DME 180
1020235335 L T P C
Green Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
● Rao M.N. and Dutta A.K. “Wastewater treatment”, Oxford & IBH publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, Second Edition, 2006
● Rao CS Environmental Pollution Control Engineering-, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
● Canter, R.L., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill Inc., New Delhi, 1996.
● Shukla, S.K. And Srivastava, P.R., “Concepts In Environmental Impact Analysis”, Common
Wealth Publishers, New Delhi, 1992.
Web-based/Online Resources
● https://www.epa.gov/green-engineering/about-green-engineering
● https://ceat.okstate.edu/che/site_files/docs/david-t-allen.pdf
● Green engineering principles and applications, DOI:10.13140/RG.2.2.19639.65449
● https://www.vssut.ac.in/lecture_notes/lecture1424353637.pdf
● https://joycelau99.wordpress.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/introduction-to-environmenta
l-engineering.pdf
● https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104225
● https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/104/110104119
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CsqEClHQBCI&list=PLx3rZEiwFTIO_2_STJGSsq9Mya7kjQVCy
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ri9rcXxcKdA

2023 REGULATION
DME 181
1020235335 L T P C
Green Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Instruments/Facilities required to conduct the practical sessions
Sl.No Equipment/ Instruments required Quantity

Required
1 Sound level Meter(SLM)/ Integrating Sound Level Meter(ISLM) 01
2 CO2 Meter 01
3 CO Meter 01
4 pH meter 01
5 TDS meter 01
6 Energy meter 01
7 Vibration meter 01
8 Water hardness test kit 01
9 Other metrology instruments(Vernier calliper, thermometer etc) As reqd


Four questions will be asked from every unit, students should write any two questions for
10 marks. The question may have two subdivisions only.

2023 REGULATION
DME 182
1020235336 L T P C
Lean Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Introduction
Lean Manufacturing is a systematic approach to minimizing waste within a manufacturing
system while simultaneously maximizing productivity. Originating from the Toyota Production
System (TPS), lean manufacturing principles focus on creating more value for customers with
fewer resources.
At its core, lean manufacturing aims to streamline production processes, reduce costs, and
improve quality by eliminating non-value-added activities. This is achieved through various
techniques and tools that emphasize continuous improvement, such as 5S (Sort, Set in order,
Shine, Standardize, Sustain), Kaizen (continuous improvement), Value Stream Mapping, and
Just-In-Time (JIT) production.
For diploma engineering students, learning about lean manufacturing provides essential skills
and knowledge to optimize production processes, enhance operational efficiency, and
contribute to the overall competitiveness of a manufacturing enterprise. By understanding and
applying lean principles, students can play a pivotal role in transforming traditional
manufacturing setups into more agile, responsive, and waste-free operations.
Course Objectives
It is desired that at the end of the course, the student will be equipped with the basic knowledge
of lean manufacturing, tools, techniques and implementation outcomes.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Explain the importance of tools used in lean manufacturing.
CO2: Explain the importance of tools and technique of TQM.
CO3: Understand the objective and functions of TPM.
CO4: Describe the Design of Experiments, Designing for Quality, and Quality in Service
Sectors.
CO5: Apply the concept of six sigma and quality circle.

2023 REGULATION
DME 183
1020235336 L T P C
Lean Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 1 - 1
CO2 3 1 - 1
CO3 3 1 - 1
CO4 3 1 - 1
CO5 3 1 - 1
to learn.
projects.
possible.

2023 REGULATION
DME 184
1020235336 L T P C
Lean Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Written
Examination
Mode (Complete
Theory
Portions)
Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100

Converted
10 10 15 15 60
to
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:

2023 REGULATION
DME 185
1020235336 L T P C
Lean Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
exercise.
file with documents. The Procedure, steps, observations and report should be written by
the student manually in the documents. The evaluated practical document should be
submitted for the Practical Test (CA3). The mark scored by the students should be
converted to 30 marks. The same should be included as per the allocation in the
practical test.

F Viva Voce 10
Total 100

2023 REGULATION
DME 186
1020235336 L T P C
Lean Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
assessment.
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents.
UNIT I Introduction
Lean Manufacturing: Introduction, Definitions of Lean manufacturing, explaining 6
basic concepts. Overview of historical development. Management theory.
Primary Tools of Lean manufacturing: 5-S, Workplace organization, Total Productive
Maintenance, Process mapping - Value stream mapping, Work cell.
Secondary Tools of Lean manufacturing: Objective and benefits of Secondary lean
tool, Cause and Effect diagram, Pareto chart, Spider chart, Poka yoke, Kanban,
Automation, Single minute exchange of die (SMED), Design for manufacturing and
assembly, Just in time (JIT), Visual workplace, OEE.
UNIT II Total Quality Management
TQM Tools And Techniques: The seven traditional tools of quality, New 6
management tools, and Six sigma: Concepts, methodology, applications to
manufacturing, service sector including IT, Benchmarking, Reason to bench mark,
Benchmarking process, FMEA, Stages, and Types. Quality circles , Quality Function
Deployment (QFD), Taguchi quality loss function, TPM ,Concepts, improvement
needs, Cost of Quality , Performance measures.

2023 REGULATION
DME 187
1020235336 L T P C
Lean Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
UNIT III Total Productive Management

Total Productive Maintenance: Objectives and functions, Tero technology, 6
Reliability Centered Maintenance (RCM), maintainability prediction, availability and
system effectiveness, maintenance costs, maintenance organization. Minimal
repair, maintenance types, balancing PM and breakdown maintenance, Primary
and secondary tool for TPM, Case studies related to TPM.
UNIT IV Design of Experiments, Designing for Quality, Quality in Service Sectors.
Design of Experiments: Introduction , Methods, Taguchi approach, Achieving 6
robust design, Steps in experimental design
Designing for Quality: Introduction to Concurrent Engineering, Quality Function
Deployment (QFD) and Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA), Concept,
Methodology and Application (with case studies).
Quality in Service Sectors: Characteristics of Service Sectors, Quality Dimensions
in Service Sectors, Measuring Quality in Different Service Sectors.
UNIT V Six Sigma, Quality Circle.
Six Sigma: Meaning of six sigma, Why six sigma, Six sigma improvement model, 6
DMAIC and DMADV principle, , building six sigma organization and culture, Six
sigma application.
Quality Circle: Quality Circle structure, Its operation, Characteristics of Quality
Circle, developing quality circle in organization, Basic problem solving techniques.
PRACTICAL EXERCISES 20
Exercise 1: Conduct a 5S audit in a specific area of the plant. Create a checklist for
each of the 5S steps and evaluate and implement improvements.
Exercise 2: Create a preventive maintenance plan for a critical piece of equipment.
Document the steps, schedule the maintenance tasks, and assign responsibilities
to maintenance personnel.

2023 REGULATION
DME 188
1020235336 L T P C
Lean Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3
Exercise 3: Identify a recurring equipment issue and organize a Kaizen event to

address it. Use root cause analysis to identify the underlying problem and
implement a solution using the PDCA cycle.
Exercise 4: Create an SOP for a routine maintenance task.
Exercise 5: Root Cause Analysis with 5 Whys. Identify a specific issue and ask
"Why?" it occurred. Continue asking "Why?" for each answer until the root cause is
identified (typically five times). Document the process and solutions to address the
root cause.
Exercise 6: Pareto Chart Creation. Use the data collected on defects to create a
Pareto chart. List the types of defects in descending order of frequency and plot
the cumulative percentage. Identify the top 20% of defects that cause 80% of the
problems and prioritize them for improvement.
Total 60
Reference
1. J Evans and W Linsay, The Management and Control of Quality, 6'th Edition, Thomson,
2005.
2. Besterfield, D H et al., “Total Quality Management”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
3. D. C. Montgomery, Design and Analysis of Experiments, John Wiley & Sons, 6th Edition,
2004.
4. K C Jain and A K Chitale , “Quality Assurance and Total Quality Management (ISO 9000,
QS 9000 ISO 14000)” by, Khanna Publishers.
5. B. L. Hanson & P. M. Ghare, “Quality Control & Application”, Prentice Hall of India.

2023 REGULATION
DME 189
1020235336 L T P C
Lean Manufacturing
PRACTICUM 2 0 2 3



2023 REGULATION
DME 190
1020235440 L T P C
MAINTENANCE, REPAIR AND SERVICE
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
To meet out Globalization, technological advances and to sustain, we have to explore the
knowledge about machine tools covering the various operations and Maintenance skill sets
required for the development of a nation and its people.
Course Objectives:
1. To enable the student to understand the principles, functions and practices adopted in
industry for the successful management of maintenance activities.
2. To explain different maintenance categories like preventive maintenance, condition
monitoring and repair of machine tool.
3. To illustrate some of the simple instruments used for condition monitoring in industry.
4. To Understand the Repairs procedure and Service methods followed in the Industry.
Course Outcomes
On successful completion of this course,the student will be able to,
CO1: Describe about Maintenance principles, types of Maintenance and Maintenance planning.
CO2 : Explain the Maintenance Economics and Maintenance organization.
CO3 : Demonstrate the necessary skills for fixing and testing of different components and
drives used in the Industry
CO4 : Explain the Repairs and service methodology followed in the Industry
CO5 : Demonstrate the necessary skills for Repairing and servicing of different Machine Tools
used in the Industry
Pre-requisites:
Applied science, Basic workshop practice, Manufacturing Process, Machine Tool theory.

REGULATION 2023
DME 191
1020235440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 1 1 3 1
CO2 1 1 3 -
CO3 1 1 3 1
CO4 1 1 3 -
CO5 1 1 3 1
confidence.
experiment outcomes and analyse potential sources of error in case of discrepancies

REGULATION 2023
DME 192
1020235440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode Practical Written Test Practical Practical

Practical Test
Test Theory Test Examination

Exercises Exercises
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 193
1020235440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

exercise.
file with documents. The procedure and sketch should be written by the student
manually in the documents.
B Procedure / Sketch / Setting / Tool Handling 20
C Alignment test / Dismantling / Assembling 20
TOTAL 50
60
Cycle I: 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
Cycle II: 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10.

REGULATION 2023
DME 194
1020235440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
Syllabus Contents
Theory Portion
Unit I: Maintenance: Basic principles of maintenance planning – Importance of 8

Maintenance - objectives and principles of planned maintenance activity -
importance and benefits of sound maintenance systems – Reliability and machine
availability – MTBF, MTTR and MWT – Factors of availability – Maintenance
organization. Maintenance – Types – Preventive, Breakdown, Scheduled –
Comparison – Maintenance Schedule – Maintenance Economics – Condition
Monitoring – Cost Comparison – With and Without condition monitoring –
Introduction to TPM – TPM Pillars
Practical Exercises
1. Testing of Lathe machine alignments and prepare a test chart. 4
a) Level of lathe.
b) True running of spindle.
c) Alignment of both centres.
d) Parallelism of main spindle to saddle movements

REGULATION 2023
DME 195
1020235440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
2. Testing of Pillar type drilling machine alignments and prepare a test chart. 4
a) Level of the Drilling machine.
b) True running of Spindle Taper.
c) Squareness of Spindle axis with Table
3. Dismantle and assemble the tailstock of the lathe. Identify the troubles and 4
mention the corrective measures.
4. Dismantle and assemble of D C Motor. Identify the troubles and mention the 4
corrective measures.
5. Dismantle and assemble the Hydraulic cylinder. Identify the troubles and 4
mention the corrective measures.
6. Dismantling and assembly of Directional control valve. Identify the troubles 4
and mention the corrective measures.
Theory Portion
Unit II : Repair and Service: 7
Repair methods of the machine components - Failure analysis - Logical fault
location – Sequential fault location – Equipment records – Job order system – Use
of computers in maintenance – Repair cycle.
Transmission systems - Belt drive - chain drive - gear drive.
Tools required for the installation and maintenance.
Practical Exercises
7. Bearing: Inspection, Removal, Cleaning, lubrication and refitting of bearings. 4
Dismantle and assemble the bearing from a shaft assembly unit.
8. Couplings: Maintenance, Repair and replacement and alignment of shaft. 4
Installation and alignment of driving and driven shafts using Plummer block
bearings.
9. Belts: Mounting of belts and checking of slip. Installation of belt drives using 4
Motor, V belt and driving and driven pulley.
10. Chain drive: Tighten and replace the chain. Installation of chain drives using 4
motor, sprocket and chain drive.
11. Gear drives : (i) Checking of correct meshing (ii) Checking of wear of teeth 4
(iii) Checking of crack / damage.
12. Dismantling, inspecting and assembling of constant mesh gear box and find 4
out the gear ratios.
Assessment Test and Revision 12
Total 75

REGULATION 2023
DME 196
1020235440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

1. Observe the Lathe, drilling, Milling, Grinding and CNC machine of the institute and study its
Operation and Maintenance manual .
2. List the possible Breakdown maintenance procedure that can be done on that machine.
TEXT BOOKS / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Srivastava S K., “Industrial Maintenance Management”, 7th Edition, S. Chand and Co
2019.
2. Venkataraman K “Maintenance Engineering and Management”, 11th Edition, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2017.
3. Bhattacharya S N., “Installation, Servicing and Maintenance” , 10th Edition, S. Chand and
Co., 2019.

Note:
All the exercises should be given in the question paper and students are allowed to select by a
lot or the question paper allotted from the DOTE shall be used.
Allocation Marks for End Semester Exam
D Troubles / Report / Test Chart / 10
E Written test (Theory Portions) 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 197
1020235440 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
1 Tail stock 2 Nos

2 AC Induction motor 2 Nos
3 DC Motor 2 Nos
4 Lathe 2 Nos
5 Drilling Machine 2 Nos
6 Milling Machine 2 Nos
7 Surface Grinder 1 No.
8 Tool & Cutter Grinder 1 No.
9 Bearing with shaft assembly unit 2 Nos
10 Plummer block 2 Nos
11 Abrasive belt grinder 1 No.
12 Belt drive conveyor unit 2 Nos
13 Counter mesh gear box 1 No.
14 Steering gear box 1 No.
15 Magnetic stand with dial indicator 4 Nos.
16 Straight edge 2 Nos
17 Spirit level 2 Nos
18 Test Mandrels 2 Nos

REGULATION 2023
DME 198
1020235541 L T P C
CNC Programming
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction
Computer Numerical Control (CNC) programming is a vital subject for diploma engineering
students, focusing on the automation of machine tools through computer systems. CNC
technology is foundational in modern manufacturing, allowing for precision, efficiency, and the
ability to produce complex parts with minimal human intervention.
Proficiency in CNC programming opens up numerous career opportunities in various industries
such as automotive, aerospace, manufacturing, and more. CNC programmers and operators are
essential for creating high-quality, precision-engineered products.
This course equips students with the knowledge and skills necessary to excel in the dynamic
and technologically advanced field of CNC machining, making them valuable assets in the
engineering and manufacturing sectors.
Course Objectives
● To understand the fundamentals of CNC
● To explain the construction and tooling of the CNC machine
● To Programme Production Jobs for CNC Turning Centre for different operations
● To Programme production jobs for CNC Vertical Machining Centre for different
operations
● To operate a CNC lathe
● To operate a CNC milling machine
Course Outcomes
CO1: Recall safety procedure to be followed while working in CNC Machines.
CO2: Create CNC part program for cylindrical components using CNC Turning Centre
CO3: Produce components using CNC Turning centre
CO4: Create CNC part program for rectangular components using CNC Machining Centre
CO5: Produce components using CNC Machining centre

REGULATION 2023
DME 199
1020235541 L T P C
CNC Programming
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Pre-requisites
Knowledge of CNC Machines, Tools and accessories.
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 2 2 3 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 3 3 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 3 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 3 3 2 3 3
curiosity to learn.
projects.
as possible.

REGULATION 2023
DME 200
1020235541 L T P C
CNC Programming
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)

Portion Cycle I Cycle II All Exercises

All Portions All Exercises
Exercises Exercises Experiments
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 201
1020235541 L T P C
CNC Programming
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

next experiment.
file with documents. The part program, procedure, sketch and output should be written
by the student manually in the documents.

A Aim & Tools Required 10
B Writing Part Program 20
C Editing Program in machine and Component 20
TOTAL 50
60
Cycle I: 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Cycle II: 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9.

REGULATION 2023
DME 202
1020235541 L T P C
CNC Programming
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks

C Simulation 10
D Editing Program in machine and Component 20
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 203
1020235541 L T P C
CNC Programming
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus contents
THEORY
Introduction to NC, CNC and DNC – Components of a CNC system: Program, 15

Machine Control Unit, and Machine Tool – Toolings for CNC – ISO Designation
for Tooling – Tool Material Selection – Tool Inserts.
Steps involved in CNC Programming: Process Planning, Part Programming,
Program Entry, Program Verification, and Production – Manual Part
Programming, Data required for Manual Part Programming – Coordinate
system – Designation of axes – Datum points and Reference Points – NC
Dimensioning: Absolute, and Incremental - CNC Programming procedure –
Format of a program.
CNC Part Programming for Turning Centres – Axes system used for turning -
Preparatory functions (G-Codes) for turning Centres – Auxiliary functions
(M-Codes) for turning centres – Tool function codes – Speed function codes
– Feed Specification codes - Rapid Positioning – Tool nose radius
compensation - Linear Interpolation – Circular Interpolation/Filleting.
Canned/Fixed Cycles: Box turning cycle (G90) - Taper turning (G90) –
Facing/Taper facing cycle (G94) – Grooving/Parting cycle (G75) – Single
threading cycle (G92) and Multiple threading cycle (G76) – Multiple turning
cycle or Stock removal cycle (G70 & G71) – Peck drilling cycle (G74) –
Boring/Taper Boring cycle (G90)
CNC Part Programming for Machining Centres – Axes system used for
Machining centres - Preparatory functions (G-Codes) for Machining Centres –
Auxiliary functions (M-Codes) for Machining centres – Preset – Cutter radius
compensation – Tool length compensation - Linear Interpolation – Circular
Interpolation.
Canned Cycles: Drilling cycle (G81) – Counter sinking/Counter boring (G82) –
Tapping cycle (G84) – Reaming Cycle (G85) – Boring Cycle (G86) – Peck

REGULATION 2023
DME 204
1020235541 L T P C
CNC Programming
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
drilling cycle (G83) – Sub Program – Mirroring – Circular Pocketing (G170 &
G171) – Rectangular Pocketing (G172 & G173).
Ex.No Name of the Experiment
1. Write a Part Program for producing the component shown below in 5

the turning center, simulate it and produce the component – Using
Linear and Circular Interpolation. Raw Material Size: φ 30 mm dia x
41 mm length. Component Diagram:
2. Write a Part Program for producing the component shown below in 5

the turning center, simulate it and produce the component – Using
Box turning cycle, Facing cycle, and Grooving cycle (G90, G94, and
G75). Raw Material Size: φ 30 mm dia x 70 mm length
Component Diagram: Note: Facing 0.5 mm (20 mm to 19.5 mm)

REGULATION 2023
DME 205
1020235541 L T P C
CNC Programming
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
3. Write a Part Program for producing the component shown below in the 5
turning center, simulate it and produce the component – Using the
threading cycle (G92/G76).
Raw Material Size: φ 25 mm dia x 70 mm length
Component Diagram:
turning center, simulate it and produce the component – Using multiple
turning cycle (G70 & G71).
Component Diagram:

REGULATION 2023
DME 206
1020235541 L T P C
CNC Programming
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
turning center, simulate it and produce the component – Using Peck
drilling and Boring cycles (G74 & G90)
Component Diagram:
Steps: (1). Pilot Drill – 3 mm dia, (2). Drill 10 mm dia, (3). Boring to
15 mm dia, (4). Taper Boring to 21 mm dia
Machining center, simulate it and produce the component – Using Linear
and Circular Interpolation
Raw Material Size: 100 mm x 100 mm x 15 mm
Component Diagram:

REGULATION 2023
DME 207
1020235541 L T P C
CNC Programming
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Machining center, simulate it and produce the component – Using Peck
drilling, Reaming, Tapping and counter-sinking cycles
Component Diagram:
Machining center, simulate it and produce the component – Using
Mirroring function
Component Diagram:

REGULATION 2023
DME 208
1020235541 L T P C
CNC Programming
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Machining center, simulate it and produce the component – Using
Circular and Rectangular Pocketing
Component Diagram:
Revision + Test 15
Total 75
Textbook:
1. S.K. Sinha, CNC Programming, Galgotia Publications Pvt Ltd., 2011
2. P. M. Agrawal, and V. J. Patel, CNC Fundamentals and Programming, First Edition,
Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Limited, 2009.
3. Pawan Negi, Mangey Ram, and Om Prakash Yadav, Basics of CNC Programming, River
Publishers, 2019
4. Peter Smid, CNC Control Setup for Milling and Turning Mastering CNC Control Systems,
Industrial Press, 2010.
Website links for reference:

1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_5r2XR1h1aQ
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eJ432X2dR9A

REGULATION 2023
DME 209
1020235541 L T P C
CNC Programming
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Note:
All the exercises/experiments should be completed before the Board Practical Examinations.
End Semester Practical examination should be conducted for all the exercises / experiments for
100 Marks. Students will be permitted to select any one exercise by lot or question paper
supplied by the DOTE Exam section shall be used. The practical document prepared by the
student should be submitted with a Bonafide Certificate.

C Simulation 10
D Editing Program in machine and Component 20
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100
LIST OF EQUIPMENT
1. CNC Turning centre - 2 No.
2. CNC Milling Centre - 2 No.
3. CNC Simulation Software
4. Computer - 30 Nos.

REGULATION 2023
DME 210
1020235542 L T P C
Systems Applications and Product (SAP)
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
SAP stands for Systems, Applications, and Products. The practical use of SAP was first seen
when data related to accounts and payroll was stored in an electrical device with specific
programs to use the database logically and practically. ERP software is one of the most critical
aspects of SAP software. To understand why the SAP Course is so important and popular, one
needs to know about the areas where it works and the other aspects attached to SAP. Almost
80% of medium and small-sized organizations have joined the list of SAP services alongside
large organizations.
Course Objectives:
After completing this subject, the student will be able to
⮚ Equip with the skills and knowledge of SAP
⮚ Develop and maintain SAP applications using various programming language.
⮚ Understand the TDA/SAP process
⮚ Understand the key steps in the TDA/SAP process.
⮚ Be able to communicate the TDA/SAP process to others.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Understand the fundamental concepts of Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) and SAP.
CO2: Establish a strong foundation in ABAP programming.
CO3: Develop skills in managing data structures using the ABAP Data Dictionary.
CO4: Introduce Object-Oriented ABAP concepts.
CO5: Master the creation of various types of ABAP reports.
Pre-requisites:
Knowledge of basics of Engineering and Industrial engineering

REGULATION 2023
DME 211
1020235542 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 - - - - 3 1 3
CO2 - - - - 3 3 3
CO3 - - - 1 - 3 2
CO4 - 1 3 3 2 3 2
CO5 - 2 3 3 3 3 3
● The instructional strategy for teaching SAP in polytechnic colleges emphasizes practical
application and industry relevance.
● Through a curriculum aligned with the state technical education board, the syllabus is
broken down into manageable units, prioritizing topics pertinent to Indian engineering
contexts.
confidence
applications to help students understand and appreciate course concepts
● Interactive Learning: Utilize demonstrations and plan interactive student activities
for an engaging learning experience.
● Simulation and Real-World Practice: Conduct demonstrations and hands-on
activities in a simulated environment, transitioning to real-world scenarios when
possible.
● Encourage Critical Analysis: Foster an environment where students can honestly
assess experiment outcomes and analyze potential sources of error in case of
discrepancies.

REGULATION 2023
DME 212
1020235542 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
● Continuous feedback mechanisms ensure the refinement and effectiveness of the

instructional approach.
Semester
(60 marks)

Portion Cycle I Cycle II All Exercises

All Portions All Exercises
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15
Internal 60
40
Marks
Tentative
Schedule
Note:

REGULATION 2023
DME 213
1020235542 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Marks.
next experiment.
file documents. The Program, Procedure, Sketch and Output should be written by the
student manually. The detailed date of the practices and its evaluations should be
maintained in the course logbook. The log book and the practical documents should be
submitted for the verification by the Flying Squad and DOTE Official.

A Aim / Procedure 10
B Steps / Execution 20
C Report / Presentation 20
TOTAL 50
60
Cycle I: 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
Cycle II: 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10.

REGULATION 2023
DME 214
1020235542 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks

D Result 10
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 215
1020235542 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus Contents
Theory Portion- Unit I : SAP:
Introduction–SAP - SAP r/3 architecture - central system – distributed presentation 8

- 2-tier configuration - 3-tier configuration. System landscape and flow - single
system landscape - two system landscape - three system landscape - multi system
landscape. Installation of sap - installation concepts on windows & UNIX and quick
sizing - naming convention, software kit, sap licensing - installation procedure –
windows application server for unix sap system - r/3 directory structure, kernel gui
administrator – optimization – security. Operation modes - manual switching of op
modes - exceptional mode – monitoring.
Practical Exercises
Exercise 1: Creating and Maintaining Master Records, Architecture - Logon and 5
Password Security, Protecting Special Users
Exercise 2: Creating and Maintaining Single and Mass Users and User Groups - 5
Copying, Deleting.
Exercise 3: Creating and Maintaining Single and Mass Users and User Groups 5
Locking / Unlocking Users.
Exercise 4: Create/Maintaining Authorization/Profile Manually 5
Exercise 5: Create/Maintaining Roles/Generating Profiles by using PFCG. 5
Theory Portion - Unit II : SAP General Administration:

General Administration – client administration - client maintenance - copying client 7
within r/3 system (local). copying client between r/3 systems (remote) -
export/import - protecting client.
Monitoring and verifying a client copy - deleting client - tips and
troubleshooting.General administration - transport management system - tms
terminology and concepts - configuring tms and checking transport directory -
configuring transport domain, domain controller and group - configuring virtual sap
system and displaying configuration - including sap systems in the transport

REGULATION 2023
DME 216
1020235542 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
domain - creating consolidation and delivery routes - maintaining sap systems

without common transport directory - configuring external systems - locking and
unlocking tms for a sap system - deleting sap system from the transport domain -
deleting tms configuration. Change and Transport System - releasing and
transporting change request and tasks - customizing, workbench, transport
organizer - importing change requests. Spool Administration - print related
terminology in os/sap level - setting local, remote and front-end printing - logical
and real spool server - managing spool requests using output controller -
connecting output devices to window system – saplpd, TemSE, Authorization.
Practical Exercises
Exercise 6: Creating Consolidation and Delivery Routes- Maintaining SAP Systems 5
without Common Transport Directory - Configuring External System.
Exercise 7: Locking and Unlocking TMS for a SAP System. 5
Exercise 8: Deleting SAP System from the Transport Domain. 5
Exercise 9: Deleting TMS Configuration From the Transport Domain. 5
Exercise 10: Connecting Output Devices to Window System. 5
Total 75

1. Sushil Markandeya , Kaushik Roy, SAP ABAP: Hands-On Test Projects with Business
Scenarios, Apress, 2014.
2. Martin Murray, Jawad Akhtar, Materials Management with SAP ERP: Functionality and
Technical Configuration, SAP Press, First Edition, 2016.
3. Sudipta Malakar, SAP/ ABAP/ HANA Programming, BPB Publication, 2018

REGULATION 2023
DME 217
1020235542 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Web Reference:
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1jFQMadZLfs
● https://www.coursera.org/sap
● Free SAP Training | openSAP
● SAP Help Portal

Note:
D Result 10
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 218
1020235543 L T P C
Industrial IoT
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
Industrial Internet of Things or IIoT refers to interconnected instruments, sensors and other
devices which can be networked together in an industrial setting. This connectivity enables
remote access, efficient monitoring, data acquisition and collection, analysis and exchange of
different data sources and a lot more. IIoT solutions have enormous potential for increasing
productivity, and are also known for their low cost and quick implementation.
Course Objectives:
● Understand the application of IIoT in automation of commercial and real world
applications.
● Summarize the functions of various types of sensors.
● Understand the Designing Industrial IOT Systems for various applications.
● Facilitate the students to design simple IIoT concepts.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Explain the basic computing features of the Arduino platform and programming.
CO2: Adapt to the Arduino platform and display their name in the LCD display.
CO3: Perform LED blinking and LED pattern creation with push button control with
Arduino.
CO4: Perform IR sensor interfacing, ultrasonic sensor interfacing and soil moisture
interfacing with ESP32.
CO5: Design a system that integrates ultrasonic sensors for accurate distance
measurement.
Pre-requisites:
Applied Physics

REGULATION 2023
DME 219
1020235543 L T P C
Industrial IoT
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 - 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 - 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 - 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 - 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 - 1 3 - - -
● It is advised that teachers take steps to increase the students’ attention and boost their
curiosity to learn.
projects.
● Incorporate formative and summative assessments to measure student progress and
possible.

REGULATION 2023
DME 220
1020235543 L T P C
Industrial IoT
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Practical Practical Written Test Practical Practical
Mode
Cycle I Cycle II All Exercises
Portion All Portions All Exercises
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 221
1020235543 L T P C
Industrial IoT
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
next experiment.
This documentation can be carried out in a separate notebook / printed manual / file.
The Program, Procedure, Sketch and Output should be written by the student manually.

C Execution 20
TOTAL 50
60
Cycle I: 1, 2, 3 4, and 5.
Cycle II: 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10.

REGULATION 2023
DME 222
1020235543 L T P C
Industrial IoT
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks

C Execution 20
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 223
1020235543 L T P C
Industrial IoT
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus Contents
Theory Portion
UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL IOT (IIOT) SYSTEMS Period

The Various Industrial Revolutions, Role of Internet of Things (IoT) & Industrial 7
Internet of Things (IIoT) in Industry, Industry 4.0 revolutions, Support System for
Industry 4.0, Smart Factories.
UNIT II: IMPLEMENTATION SYSTEMS FOR IIOT
Sensors and Actuators for Industrial Processes, Sensor networks, Process 8
automation and Data Acquisitions on IoT Platform, Microcontrollers and
Embedded PC roles in IIoT, Wireless Sensor nodes with Bluetooth, WiFi, and LoRa
Protocols and IoT Hub systems.
1 To implement LED Blink and LED pattern with Arduino 5

Creating different LED patterns and controlling with push button 5
2
switches.
3 Automated LED light control based on input from IR sensor and LDR 5
4 To display your name in a LCD 16 x2 display with Arduino. 5
5 Controlling servo motors with the help of joystick 5
6 Measurement of temperature and Pressure using ESP32 5
Calculate the distance to an object with the help of an Ultrasonic sensor 5

7
and display it on a LCD
Design a system that integrates ultrasonic sensors for accurate distance 5
8
measurement in the identified areas.
integrate sensors such as GPS, accelerometers, and panic Basic 5
9
Burglar alert security system with the help of PIR sensor and Buzzer
Modules and sensor interfacing - Interfacing IR sensor and LED with 5
10
ESP32
Revision + Continuous Assessment 10
Total Period 75

REGULATION 2023
DME 224
1020235543 L T P C
Industrial IoT
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

1. Each students to write and submit the assignment on the topic ‘Contrast IT and OT’
2. Four students can be grouped as a batch and practice an additional experiment to
interface any one of the Arduino compatible sensors with Arduino and observe the
behaviour of sensors.
3. Introduction to Arduino platform and programming
4. Study on various sensors and actuators.
1. Sudip Misra, Anandarup Mukherjee, Arijit Roy, Introduction to IoT, First Edition,
Cambridge University Press, 2022.
2. Alasdair Gil Christ, Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things, Apress, Publications,
2016.
3. Sudan Jha, Usman Tariq, Gyanendra Prasad Joshi, Vijender Kumar Solanki, Industrial
Internet of Things: Technologies, Design, and Applications, CRC Press, 2022.
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_cs69/preview
Quantity
S.No Name of the Equipment’s
Required
1. Arduino UNO set 15
2. ESP32 set -Type C 15
3. LED Bulb 15
4. Resistor 15
5. Push button 15
6. Servo motor 5V DC 15
7 DC motor 15
8 5V DC Relay 15

REGULATION 2023
DME 225
1020235543 L T P C
Industrial IoT
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
9 Mini Breadboard 15
10 16 X 2 LCD Display with TTL 15
11 Gas sensor MQ2 15
12 IR Sensor 15
13 Temperature sensor DHT11 module 15
14 Ultrasonic sensor HC-SR04 15
15 Joystick module 15
16 Jumper wires - 3 nos. As Required

Note:

C Execution 20
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 226
1020235544 L T P C
Advanced Welding Technologies
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
This syllabus outlines advanced welding technologies that covers various welding processes
and techniques. The course is divided into 3 units that cover topics like introductory welding
concepts, common arc and resistance welding processes, welding metallurgy, and weldment
inspection and testing. The course aims to impart knowledge of advanced welding practices,
welding process parameters, and the comparative merits of different welding methods.
Students should learn to select the appropriate welding technique for various joint types and
understand how to produce quality weldments.
Course Objectives:
1. To learn various concepts related to welding and its applications.
2. To have practical purview of various welding processes, welding standards, and
advanced welding processes.
3. Familiarise with the working of the various welding processes.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Explain the physics of Welding
CO2: Identify the appropriate Welding technique for the components
CO3: Select proper techniques to identify the welding defects
CO4: Acquire skills on advanced welding techniques
CO5: Demonstrate the necessary skills to identify the defects in welding.
Pre-requisites:
Knowledge of metal joining procedure

REGULATION 2023
DME 227
1020235544 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3
1. Engage and Motivate: Instructors should actively engage students to boost their learning
confidence.
2. Real-World Relevance: Incorporate relatable, real-life examples and engineering
3. Interactive Learning: Utilize demonstrations and plan interactive student activities for an
4. Application-Based Learning: Employ a theory-demonstrate-practice-activity strategy
5. Simulation and Real-World Practice: Conduct demonstrations and hands-on activities in
6. Encourage Critical Analysis: Foster an environment where students can honestly assess

REGULATION 2023
DME 228
1020235544 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15
60
Internal Marks 40
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 229
1020235544 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Each exercise should be completed on the day of practice.
commencement of the next experiment.
The Steps, Procedure, Sketch and Result should be written by the student manually.
A Joint Preparation 20
B Procedure 20
C Weld bead 10
TOTAL 50
60

Cycle - II Exercise 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12.

REGULATION 2023
DME 230
1020235544 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
B Procedure 20
C Weld bead 10
D Finish 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 231
1020235544 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus contents
Theory Portion Period
UNIT 1: Introduction and physics of welding 15
Overview of welding processes and their classification, edge preparation, weld
symbols – types of joints - weld nomenclature - electrode - codes – flux coating -
modes of metal transfer – heat sources – types of welding arc - Arc characteristics
- Voltage-current characteristics – welding efficiency - heat affected zone (HAZ) -
welding techniques
UNIT 2: Arc, Gas and other welding processes
Fundamental principles - arc welding – carbon arc welding – shielded metal arc
welding – submerged arc welding – TIG – MIG – plasma arc welding – electro slag
welding - advantages, limitations and applications; Oxy-acetylene welding –
air-acetylene welding – advantages, limitations and applications.
LASER beam welding, robot welding, solid state welding - diffusion bonding,
explosive welding, ultrasonic welding, friction welding, forge welding - thermit
welding - atomic hydrogen welding - electron beam welding - under water welding -
electric resistance welding, spot, seam – its advantages, disadvantages and
applications.
UNIT 3: Welding defects and Inspection
Welding defects – causes and remedies – Weldability test - Weldability of metals
like steels, stainless steels, aluminium, copper, nickel and titanium alloys –
inspections – purpose – inspection methods – visual inspection - DPT – MPT –
radiographic test – ultrasonic test – phased array ultrasonic test (PAUT) - case
studies in testing of welded joints - Software in welding and importance.
Practice 10
Arc welding basic exercises (for practice) :
Lap joint, Butt joint, Corner joint, T-joint
Gas welding basic exercises (for practice) :
Lap joint, Butt joint, Corner joint, T-joint

REGULATION 2023
DME 232
1020235544 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Practical Exercises
Exercises for Practical Exam.: 40
1. Make a butt and fillet joints by down hand welding (single V) using arc
welding.
2. Make a butt and fillet joints by vertical welding using arc welding.
3. Welding of pipes using arc welding
4. Butt welding of thin sheets leftward, rightward and downward using gas
welding.
5. Welding of tubes using gas welding.
6. TIG welding practice – butt joint.
7. MIG welding practice – butt joint.
8. Spot welding practice in thin sheets.
9. Inspection of welding – visual and magnetic particle test.
10. Inspection of welding – die penetrant test and ultrasonic test.
Revision + Test 10
Total 75


● Observe the welding machine in the institute and study its specifications. List the
possibility of different method of weld joints that can be used.
● Study the type of current used in the welding machine and draw the circuit diagram.
● Study the types of electrode used and its industrial applications.

REGULATION 2023
DME 233
1020235544 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
1. Advance Welding Technology by S.A. Rizvi , S.K. Kataria & Sons. 4th, reprint 2019.
2. Welding Engineering and Technology by R.S. PARMAR, IIT, Delhi, Kanna Publishers, 1999.
3. Welding principles and practices by Edward R. Bohnart, Mc. Graw Hill Education, 2014.
WEB REFERENCE
● https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103263/#
● https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLwdnzlV3ogoW9g44SFbiiCjyMOMPnNBL8&feat
ure=shared
Note:
B Procedure 20
C Weld bead 10
D Finish 10
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 234
1020235545 L T P C
Industrial Robotics
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction
It has been realized that rapid industrialization and globalization needs industries to be
more competitive and deliver cost effective quality products. This needs industries to
implement flexible manufacturing systems where Robotic technology plays a major role.
Hence study of robotic technology is very essential, To acquire knowledge about the
hydraulic and pneumatic systems and its functions of the components. Understand the
control methods of automation.
Course Objectives
● To understand the basics of robot components and process automation.
● To execute the Robot programming using simulation software.
● To execute the Robot programming and Execute.
● To perform the basics of robotics and simulation of software fixtures for material
handling and industrial applications.
● To execute program for various applications in manufacturing by using robot
programming and industrial safety systems.
● To learn about the software and hardware systems for industrial Robotics
Course Outcomes
CO1: Describe the components of Robot and its joints & links in Robot configuration,
CO2: Classify the robot controller Drives and grippers,
CO3: Explain industrial applications of robot in Manufacturing environment
CO4: Generate robot program for material handling applications
CO5: Execute / Simulate programs for various applications in manufacturing by using
robot programming.

REGULATION 2023
DME 235
1020235545 L T P C
Industrial Robotics
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Pre-requisites
Knowledge of Basic Robot Engineering, Robot software, Robot programming .
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 2 1
CO2 3 2 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 1
CO5 3 2 1
Real time Learning: Instructors encourage the students to implement the techniques in their
own place / Lab through the Industry-Institute interactions.

REGULATION 2023
DME 236
1020235545 L T P C
Industrial Robotics
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15
60
Internal Marks 40
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 237
1020235545 L T P C
Industrial Robotics
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
experiment.
The Steps, Procedure, Sketch and Result should be written by the student manually. The
detailed date of the practices and its evaluations should be maintained in the course
A Step / Procedure 10
B Write Program 20
C Edit Program / Simulate / Execution 20
TOTAL 50
60
Cycle - I Exercise 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.


REGULATION 2023
DME 238
1020235545 L T P C
Industrial Robotics
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
Model Practical Examination - Practical Exam
B Write Program 20
D Result / Finish / Accuracy 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 239
1020235545 L T P C
Industrial Robotics
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus contents
THEORY
Introduction – Definitions of Robot -Robot Anatomy – Basic configuration of 15

Robotics – Robot Components – Manipulator, End effecter, Driving system,
Controller and Sensors. Mechanical arm –
Degrees of freedom – Links and joints – Types of joints – Joint notation
scheme – Pitch, Yaw, Roll – Classification of robots – Work envelope, Work
Volume.
Robot controller – Configuration - Four types of controls – Open loop and

closed loop controls – Speed of response and stability – Precision of
movements: Spatial resolutions, accuracy and repeatability. Pneumatic
drives – Hydraulic drives – Mechanical drives – Electrical drives –Stepper
motors, DC Servo motors and AC Servo motors – Salient features –
Applications and Comparisons of Drives. End effecters –Grippers –
Mechanical Grippers, Magnetic Grippers, Vacuum Grippers, Two fingered and
Three fingered Grippers, Internal and External Grippers,
– End Of Arm Tooling (EOAT)- Selection and Design considerations
Robot applications – Material handling – Press loading and unloading –Die

casting – Machine tool loading and unloading – Spot welding – Arc welding
– Spray painting – Assembling – Finishing – Automatic Guided Vehicle –
Adopting robots to workstations – Requisite robot characteristics and Non
requisite robot characteristics – Stages in selecting robots for industrial
applications – Safety considerations for robot operations – Robotics in the
future and characteristics task–Economical analysis of robots – Social
implications.
Practice 6
Study of Robot system, Study and practice in the robot simulation software .

REGULATION 2023
DME 240
1020235545 L T P C
Industrial Robotics
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Practical Exercise
Ex.No Name of the Experiment
Programming using Position recording using Cartesian co-ordinate 4

1.
system - (No. of positions – 9).
Programming using Position recording using Polar co-ordinate system
2.
- (No. of positions - 9). 4
3. Programming using Loops and sub – routine. 4
4. Pick and place of objects (No. of objects to be specified- 6). 4
5. Pick and stack of objects (No. of objects to be specified- 6). 4
6. Arc welding practice(Length. of weld to be specified). 4
7. Programming using Spot welding practice - (No. of spots Minimum 3). 4
8. Assembling practice (Simple assembling). 4
9. Profile cutting practice (combination of lines and arcs). 4
10. Programming for Spray painting practice - (Area - 300mm x 300mm). 4
Programming using Machine loading and unloading practice with time
11. 4
delay.
Revision + Assessment 10
Total 75
Textbook:
1. Mikell P Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Roger N Nagel, Nicholas Odrey, and Ashish Dutta, Industrial
Robotics – Technology, Programming and Applications, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. Appuu Kuttan, Robotics, I.K. International Publishing House Pvt. Limited, 2013
3. Ganesh S. Hegde, A Textbook of Industrial Robotics, Second Edition, Laxmi Publications (P)
Ltd., 2015
4. Nagarajan Ramachandran, Introduction to Industrial Robotics, Pearson India Education
Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016

REGULATION 2023
DME 241
1020235545 L T P C
Industrial Robotics
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

● https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLyqSpQzTE6M_XM9cvjLLO_Azt1FkgPhpH
● https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLFW6lRTa1g81AGUOky_xVhNVsudGwZxsY
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
1. Robot simulation software or Robotic arm
2. Computer - 30 Nos.

Note:
All the exercises/experiments should be completed before the Board Practical Examinations. End
Semester Practical examination should be conducted for all the exercises / experiments for 100
Marks. Students will be permitted to select any one exercise by lot or question paper supplied by the

B Write Program 20
D Result / Finish / Accuracy 10
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 242
1020235546 L T P C
HVAC Systems and Components
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
To impart knowledge about HVAC system components, handling the components and testing
the performance is very much needed. This content would be useful to select the various types
of components to be used in HVAC systems with different capacities. The knowledge about
VFD compressors and capacity calculation of cooling coils is very essential in the present
scenario.
Course Objectives:
● Practice, set and adjust the LP and HP cut-out, TEV and thermostat in refrigeration
systems.
● Test the capacitor and selector switch for its working.
● Test the pumping capacity of sealed compressor.
● Determine the capacity of fan and evaporator coil of window air conditioner.
● Determine the capacity of air cooled condenser of split air conditioner.
● Determine the range, approach and efficiency of cooling tower.
Course Outcomes
After successful completion of this course, the students should be able to,
CO1: Explain the construction and working of compressor and condenser.
CO2: Explain the functions of expansion valve and evaporator.
CO3: Describe the different components in the HVAC system.
CO4: Demonstrate the various processes of HVAC system.
CO5: Demonstrate the electrical components used in HVAC system.
Pre-requisites:
Basic knowledge of HVAC Components.

REGULATION 2023
DME 243
1020235546 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3
● It is advised that teachers take steps to pique pupils' attention and boost their learning
confidence.
● To help students learn and appreciate numerous concepts and principles in each area,
● The demonstration can make the subject exciting and foster in the students a scientific
● All demonstrations/Hand-on practices are under a simulated environment (may be
followed by a real environment as far as possible).

REGULATION 2023
DME 244
1020235546 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
CA1 and CA2: All the exercises/experiments should be completed as per the portions
Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 245
1020235546 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

B Tools required / Observation 20
C Diagrams / Tabulation and calculation / 20
Setting / Adjusting
TOTAL 50
60

CA 3: Written Test for complete theory portions should be conducted for 100 Marks as

REGULATION 2023
DME 246
1020235546 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks
Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
CA 4: All the exercises/experiments should be completed and kept for the practical test.
Setting / Adjusting
D Result / Report 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100
Syllabus Contents
Unit 1 Compressor
Compressor – Introduction - functions of a compressor – Classification - open type
reciprocating compressor – Hermetically sealed compressors – construction and 3
working

REGULATION 2023
DME 247
1020235546 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Unit II Condenser
Condenser - Introduction – Functions ––Classification of condensers – Air cooled

condenser, Water cooled condenser - Construction and Working 3
Unit III Expansion device
3.1 Expansion devices- Introduction – Functions – Types of expansion devices
–Capillary tube, Automatic expansion valve, Thermostatic expansion valve – 3
Construction and working only.
Unit IV Evaporator
Evaporator - Introduction – Functions - Types of evaporators – Bare tube coil 3

evaporators- Finned evaporators – Construction and working only.
Unit V HVAC System Controls and Fans
5.1 Motor Operating Components: Selector switch – OLP – Relay – Capacitor – 3

Starting, Running. System Controls: LP, HP cutout –– Humidity control – Thermostat
switch – Solenoid valve.
5.2 Fans – Introduction - function of fans - Types of fans - centrifugal fans - Axial
flow fan – Propeller fan, Tube axial fan and vane axial fan – Construction and working
only.
Practical Exercise
Ex. No Name of the Exercise Periods
1 Charging of Refrigerant in a refrigeration System 4
2 Pump down of refrigerant from the refrigeration System 4
3 Find out the leak in the refrigeration System and rectify the defect 4
4 Charging of oil in the refrigeration System 4
5 Setting and Adjusting the thermostat. 4
6 Setting and Adjusting of low pressure and High pressure cut out in VCR 4
system.

REGULATION 2023
DME 248
1020235546 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
7 Setting and Adjusting of thermostatic expansion valve. 4

8 Testing the pumping capacity of a sealed compressor. 4
9 Testing and Replacement of faulty capacitor and selector switch. 4
10 Determination of capacity of fan. 4
11 Determination of capacity of evaporator coil of window / Split Air 4
conditioner
12 Determination of capacity of air cooled condenser of a Window / Split 4
Air conditioner
Revision + Test 12
Total 75

1. Prepare/Download a specification of the following:
2. Various tools, Equipments and controls used in HVAC systems
3. Presentation / seminar by students on HVAC systems
TEXT BOOKS and REFERENCES
1. ASHRAE Hand Book Heating, ventilating and Air-conditioning systems and
equipment.
2. The Institute of Plumbing - Plumbing Engineering Services Design Guide.
3. Principles of Electrical and Engineering and Electronics by V.K.Mehta and Rohit
Mehta.
● https://youtu.be/IKn3c7Sup9k?si=eWDXDgmNGB-RnGs7
● https://youtu.be/PjcdqAkP0UA?si=Ik-us0HFvDgver4M
● https://youtu.be/QgVnRsdoxwQ?si=uf3JHI_hqwK2nkRR
● https://youtu.be/6YiCjnjLKH8?si=SSc125M7ZlDARi9t

REGULATION 2023
DME 249
1020235546 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Note:
Setting / Adjusting
D Result / Report 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

Sl.No Equipments Nos
01 VCR experimental setup with thermostat, LP HP cutouts and TEV 1
02 Sealed compressor and gauge manifold set 1
03 Experimental setup for testing capacitor and selector switch 1
04 Experimental setup for determining capacity of fan and anemometer 1
05 Window air conditioner experimental setup for finding the capacity of 1
evaporator
06 Split air conditioner experimental setup for finding the capacity of 1
air cooled condenser
07 Cooling tower experimental setup 1

REGULATION 2023
DME 250
1020235547 L T P C
Automobile Technology
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
Automobiles are one of the key areas of development in India facilitated by Multinational
Companies. As automobiles are the Major sources of employing man power a thorough
knowledge on Automobile Engine construction and its functioning is required with due
consideration on pollution control.
Course Objectives:
● Explain about the constructional details of an Automobile engine including cooling
and lubrication system.
● Describe fuel feed systems for petrol and diesel engines with all devices involved in
it.
● Explain the construction and functional features of the power transmission
systems and various parts involved in it.
● Explain the functions of different types of steering, suspension and brake systems.
● Describe the different types of chassis and their functions.
● Familiarize electrical and electronic equipment used in automobiles.
● To understand the emerging trends of electric vehicles, hybrid electric vehicles and
solar vehicles.
● To know the automobile emissions and its effects on the environment.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Explain the principles of cooling and lubrication systems for an IC engine
CO2: Describe fuel feed systems for petrol and diesel engines with all its components.
CO3:Illustrate the types of steering, suspension and brake systems based on the
functions
CO4: Classify the types of Automobile Chassis and its sub systems based on their
applications.
CO5: Explore the various Electrical Equipments used in an automobile system
Pre-requisites:
Basic knowledge about internal combustion engines.

REGULATION 2023
DME 251
1020235547 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 - - 3 - - 1
CO2 3 - - 3 - - 1
CO3 3 - - 3 - - 0
CO4 3 - - 3 - - 1
CO5 3 3 - - 1
confidence.

REGULATION 2023
DME 252
1020235547 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15
60
Internal Marks 40
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 253
1020235547 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
A Procedure / Sketch / Setting / Tool Handling 20

B Alignment test / Dismantling / Assembling 20
C Troubles / Report / Test Chart 10
TOTAL 50
60


REGULATION 2023
DME 254
1020235547 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks

D Troubles / Report / Test Chart 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 255
1020235547 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus Contents
Theory Portion - Unit I
Automobile Engines Basic Engine Components and its functions, Cooling systems 2
– purpose – types. Lubrication systems – purpose.
Exercise 1: Dismantling and assembling a four stroke petrol engine and
identification of parts.
Exercise 2: Removing camshaft, replacing timing gears, removing valves, lapping
and adjusting valve clearance.
Theory Portion - Unit II
Types of fuel feed systems- S.U. Electrical fuel pump - petrol injection. Layout of 2
diesel and petrol fuel feed system CRDI system - fuel injectors
Exercise 3: Removing, servicing and replacing of fuel pump, oil pump & water
pump.
Exercise 4: Removing, servicing & replacing MPFI system.
Exercise 5: Dismantling and assembling of inline fuel injection pump / CRDI
system.
Theory Portion - Unit III
Transmission And Power Trains General arrangement of power transmission 4
system -clutch – function – Components – Types - Single plate and multi plate –
Clutch troubles and their causes. Gear box – purpose–constant mesh and
synchromesh-gear box troubles and their causes. Drive line – propeller shaft –
Universal joint –
. Differential – purpose – Construction and operation
Exercise 6: Removing and replacing of pressure plate and clutch plate, fingers
adjustment

REGULATION 2023
DME 256
1020235547 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Exercise 7: Dismantling, inspecting and assembling of constant mesh gear box and
find out the gear ratios.
Theory Portion - Unit IV
Automobile Chassis Front axle – Types– Steering gears. Suspension system – 3
Functions – Type of springs Brake system – functions – ABS.
Exercise 8: Dismantling, assembling and adjusting of steering gear box.
Theory Portion - Unit V
Electrical Equipment & Hybrid Electric Vehicles Battery – lead acid battery – Nickel 4
alkaline battery – construction and operation of starter motor. Ignition system –
Types – High tension magneto – electronic ignition – Ignition system troubles and
remedies. Lighting system - Horn circuits – Wind screen wiper.
Exercise 9: Test a battery with specific gravity test and charge the battery with
constant amperage / voltage method.
Exercise 10: Dismantling, overhauling and assembling of starter motor / alternator
Exercise 11: Trace the automobile electrical system with respect to battery coil
ignition system
Exercise 12: Trace the automobile electrical system with respect to (i) horn relay
circuit, (ii) Wiper circuit & explain with neat circuit diagram
Assessment Test + Revision 12
Total 75
TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES
1. A Textbook of Automobile Engineering by R.K.Rajput, Second Edition 2016, Laxmi
Publications.
2. Automotive Mechanics, William H.crouse and Donald .L. Anglin, Tata McGraw– Hill
Publishing CompanyLtd, NewDelhi.
3. Automotive Mechanics, Joseph Heitner, East–west Press (P) Ltd, NewDelhi

REGULATION 2023
DME 257
1020235547 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Note:

C Alignment Test / Dismantling / Assembling 20
D Troubles / Report / Test Chart 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100
1. Automobile Mechanic’s tools-Complete Set
2. Internal circlip plier, bearing puller
3. Feeler gauge to check valve clearance, hammer and accessories
4. Compressor to supply high pressure air to clean oil and water filters.
5. 4 stroke petrol engine - with all accessories
6. 4 stroke Diesel engine - with all accessories
7. Engine cylinder with liner and cylinder bore dial gauge
8. Oil pump and water pump.
9. MPFI and CRDI kit
10. Inline Fuel Injection Pump and Injectors
11. Clutch set arrangement with tools
12. Complete gear box with tools
13. Complete steering arrangement
14. Battery and charging set up.
15. Measuring instruments
16. Consumables - Sufficient quantity.

REGULATION 2023
DME 258
1020235654 L T P C
Innovation & Startup
PRACTICUM 1 0 2 2
Introduction
The integration of Innovation and Start-ups concept within the syllabus is testament to the
forward thinking nature of educational institutions. By introducing this concept, students are
provided with a solid foundation upon which they can build their skills in Innovation and
Start-ups. This course can bridge the gap between theory and practice. It allows students to
apply the knowledge they have acquired in a real world context, thereby enhancing their
understanding and retention of the above concept. This experimental learning approach not only
fosters a deeper level of engagement but also trains student with practical skills necessary to
navigate the complexities of the business world. This also empowers students to become an
Innovator or Entrepreneur. With necessary tools and knowledge, educational institutions are
preparing the next generation of entrepreneurs to tackle the challenges and opportunities that
lie ahead. This syllabus will explore the different facets of innovation, including its importance,
types and strategies for fostering a culture of innovation within organizations
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable the students
o To understand the concept of Innovation and Start-ups.
o To acquire knowledge of Prototype development, IPR, Patents and Copyrights.
o To have practical experience in preparing Business plan for Start-ups.
o To visit the existing nearby industry to prepare a project report about the present
challenges of that industry.
o To know the different funding supports available from Government and
Non-Government schemes for Start-ups.

REGULATION 2023
DME 259
1020235654 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 2 2
Course Outcomes
After successful completion of this course, the students should be able to
CO 1: Differentiate between Innovation and Start-ups
CO 2: Explain the importance of IPR, Patents and Copyrights.
CO 3: Describe the methodology to be adopted for preparing the Business Plan
CO 4: Gain practical experience by Industrial training and visiting the nearby industry
Co 5: Explore and identify various funding facilities available from Government and
Non-Government Schemes for Start-ups
Pre-requisites:
There are no specific prerequisites for this course, although a basic understanding of
business and technology concepts would be beneficial.
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 - - 1 - 2 3 3
CO2 - - 1 - 2 3 3
CO3 - - 1 - 2 3 3
CO4 - - 1 - 2 3 3
CO5 - - 1 - 2 3 3

REGULATION 2023
DME 260
1020235654 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 2 2
Examination
CA1 CA2 CA3 (60 marks)
Submission of Practical
Class Assessment Seminar
Industry Visit Examination
Mode Presentations
(Unit I, II & Unit III) Project Report
(Unit IV) (Project)
(Unit V)
Duration 2 hours --- --- 3 hours
Exam Marks 50 20 30 100
Converted to 10 10 20 60
Marks 10 10 20 60
Continuous Assessment - 40 marks

S. No Description Marks
CA 1 Class Assessment (50 marks) - Unit – I,II & III 10 marks
Written Examination - Theory Questions
10 questions out of 15 questions (10 x 3 marks :30 marks)
4 questions out of 6 questions (4 x 5 marks : 20 marks)
CA 2 Seminar Presentations (20 marks- each topic carries 10 marks) 10 marks
- Unit IV
Students should present any two topics with PPTs
CA 3 Submission of Industry Visit Project Report - (30 marks) - Unit V 20 marks
Total 40 marks

REGULATION 2023
DME 261
1020235654 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 2 2
Syllabus Contents
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INNOVATION
An Introduction to Innovation and Creativity- Innovation in current Environment - 6

Types of Innovation - Challenges of Innovation - Steps of Innovation Management -
Divergent v/s Convergent thinking - Design thinking and Entrepreneurship.
UNIT II INCUBATION CLUBS, IPR, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
Idea Generation - Incubation Clubs - Prototype Development - Marketing of 6

Innovation - Management of Innovation - Creation of IPR -Types of IPR - Patents and
Copyrights - Patents in India - Technological and Non-Technological Innovation
Process.
UNIT III GOVERNMENT AND NON-GOVERNMENT FUNDING SCHEMES FOR START-UPS
An introduction to Start-up - Start-ups in India - Procedure for registration of 6

Start-ups - Business Model- Business Plan - Case Studies - Opportunities and
Challenges - Funding supports from Government Schemes -MUDRA, TANSEED,
NEEDS, PMEGP, UYEGP – Non-Government Schemes - CSR Fund - Angel Investors -
Venture Capitalist.
UNIT IV
All the students have to select a minimum of 2 topics from the list given below. 9
They are expected to collect the resources with the help of faculty assigned to
them to prepare PPTs for presentation
1. Idea Generation.
2. Innovation Management.
3. Product Development.

REGULATION 2023
DME 262
1020235654 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 2 2
4. Business Model Innovation.

5. Organizational Culture and Change Management.
6. Leadership and Innovation.
7. Barriers to Innovation.
8. Innovation Marketing.
9. E-Commerce success stories (any one).
10. Role of Start-ups in Higher Education.
11. Professional Networking in Building Brands.
12. How to start a start-up in India.
UNIT V EXPOSURE TO INDUSTRY
All the students should visit and study the nearby industries, incubation centres, 18
start-ups etc., and select any one to prepare a project report which covers the Name
of the Industry/Organization, Introduction of the Industry, Type of the Industry,
Scope of the Industry, Plant Layout and Location, Details of Plant and Machineries,
Process flow chart, Manufacturing Methods, Process of Manufacturing, Product
Manufacturing, Quality Control, Marketing, Product selling - Conclusion.
Total 45

REGULATION 2023
DME 263
1020235654 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 2 2
End Semester Examination - Project Exam

Students should be assessed for 100 Marks both by the internal examiner and external
examiner appointed by the Chairman Board of Examinations.
Detailed Allocation of Marks

S. No Description Marks
Part A Written Examination – Unit –I,II & III 45
Theory Questions
i) 10 questions out of 15 questions (10 x 3 marks = 30 marks)
ii) 3 questions either or pattern (3 x 5 marks = 15 marks)
Part B i) Presentation of Industry Visit Project Report 25
ii)
Interaction and Evaluation 30
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 264
1020235773 C
Summer
Industrial Training
Vacation
Internship 2
Introduction
Industrial training is a crucial component of the diploma engineering curriculum, designed to
bridge the gap between theoretical knowledge and practical application. Typically conducted
during vacation periods, this two-week training program provides students with hands-on
experience in their respective engineering fields. The primary objectives are to enhance practical
skills, familiarize students with industry standards, and prepare them for future employment.
Two-week industrial training during vacation periods is an invaluable part of diploma
engineering education. It not only equips students with practical skills but also provides a
comprehensive understanding of the industry, preparing them for successful engineering
careers.
Objectives
1. Practical Exposure: Students gain direct exposure to real-world engineering practices,
tools, and technologies.
2. Skill Enhancement: The training helps in developing technical and soft skills that are
essential for professional growth.
3. Industry Insight: Students learn about the working environment, operational procedures,
and challenges faced by industries.
4. Professional Networking: The training offers opportunities to interact with industry
professionals, which can be beneficial for career prospects.
5. Application of Knowledge: It allows students to apply classroom knowledge to solve
practical problems, enhancing their understanding and retention of engineering
concepts.
Structure of the Training Program
● Orientation: Introduction to the company, its operations, and safety protocols.
● Project Assignment: Students are assigned specific projects or tasks relevant to their
field of study.
● Supervision and Mentorship: Industry professionals guide and mentor students
throughout the training.

REGULATION 2023
DME 265
1020235773 C
Summer
Industrial Training
Vacation
Internship 2
● Skill Development Workshops: Sessions on technical skills, software tools, and industry
best practices.
● Assessment and Feedback: Performance evaluations and constructive feedback to help
students improve.
Benefits for Students
● Enhanced Employability: Practical experience makes students more attractive to
potential employers.
● Confidence Building: Working in a real-world setting boosts confidence and professional
demeanor.
● Clarified Career Goals: Exposure to various roles and responsibilities helps students
define their career paths.
Course Outcomes
CO 1: Demonstrate proficiency in using industrial machinery, tools, and software.
CO 2: Able to identify, analyze, and solve engineering problems using industry-standard
methods and practices.
CO 3: Gain a comprehensive understanding of industrial manufacturing processes,
quality control, and safety practices.
CO 4: Exhibit improved communication, teamwork, and professional behavior in an
industrial setting.
CO 5: Apply theoretical concepts learned in their coursework to practical engineering
tasks and projects.
Duties Responsibilities of the Faculty Mentor.
One faculty mentor should be assigned for every 30 students by the HOD / Principal. Faculty
mentors shall play a crucial role in overseeing and guiding students during their industrial
training program in Diploma engineering.
Pre-Training Responsibilities:
1. Orientation and Preparation:
○ Conduct orientation sessions to familiarize students with the objectives,
expectations, and guidelines of the industrial training program.

REGULATION 2023
DME 266
1020235773 C
Summer
Industrial Training
Vacation
Internship 2
○ Assist students in understanding the importance of industrial training in their

academic and professional development.
2. Placement Coordination:
○ Collaborate with the placement cell or industry liaison office to secure suitable
training placements for students that align with their academic specialization
and career interests.
○ Facilitate communication between the institution and host organizations to
ensure smooth coordination of training arrangements.
3. Training Plan Development:
○ Help students develop a detailed training plan outlining learning objectives, tasks,
and expected outcomes for the training period.
○ Guide students in setting SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Relevant,
Time-bound) goals for their training experience.
During Training Responsibilities:
4. Monitoring and Support:
○ Regularly monitor the progress of students during their industrial training.
Maintain communication with both students and industry supervisors to track
performance and address any issues that may arise.
○ Provide ongoing support and guidance to students, offering advice on technical
challenges, professional conduct, and workplace etiquette.
5. Technical Guidance:
○ Offer technical guidance and mentorship related to the specific engineering
discipline or specialization of the students. Help them apply theoretical
knowledge to practical situations encountered in the industry.
6. Problem-Solving Assistance:
○ Assist students in overcoming obstacles or challenges encountered during their
training. Encourage them to develop problem-solving skills and resilience in
real-world engineering scenarios.

REGULATION 2023
DME 267
1020235773 C
Summer
Industrial Training
Vacation
Internship 2
7. Feedback and Evaluation:

○ Provide constructive feedback on students' performance based on reports,
assessments, and observations gathered from industry supervisors.
○ Evaluate students' achievements in relation to their training objectives and
competencies developed during the program.
Post-Training Responsibilities:
8. Reflection and Debriefing:
○ Conduct debriefing sessions with students to reflect on their training
experiences, discuss lessons learned, and identify areas for further improvement.
○ Help students articulate their learning outcomes and how these experiences
contribute to their professional growth.
9. Documentation and Reporting:
○ Ensure comprehensive documentation of students' training activities,
achievements, and feedback received from industry supervisors.
○ Prepare reports summarizing students' performance and submit these to
relevant departments or committees for review and assessment.
10. Career Counseling:
○ Provide career guidance and counseling to students based on their industrial
training experiences. Assist them in leveraging these experiences for future job
applications or further academic pursuits.
11. Continuous Improvement:
○ Collaborate with industry partners to continuously improve the quality and
relevance of the industrial training program.
○ Incorporate feedback from students and industry supervisors to enhance the
effectiveness of future training placements.
By fulfilling these duties and responsibilities, faculty mentors contribute significantly to the
overall educational experience and professional development of Diploma engineering students
during their industrial training program.

REGULATION 2023
DME 268
1020235773 C
Summer
Industrial Training
Vacation
Internship 2
Instructions to the students

Before Starting Industrial Training:
○ Attend orientation sessions conducted by the institution or faculty mentors to
understand the objectives, expectations, and guidelines of the industrial training
program.
○ Familiarize yourself with the specific policies, procedures, and safety regulations
of the host organization where you will be undergoing training.
2. Setting Goals:
○ Set clear and specific goals for your industrial training period. Define what skills,
knowledge, and experiences you aim to gain during this time.
○ Discuss your goals with your faculty mentor and seek their guidance in
developing a training plan that aligns with your career aspirations.
3. Professional Attire and Conduct:
○ Dress appropriately and professionally according to the standards of the industry
and host organization.
○ Maintain a positive attitude, demonstrate punctuality, and adhere to workplace
etiquette and norms.
During Industrial Training:
4. Learning and Engagement:
○ Actively engage in all assigned tasks and projects. Seek opportunities to learn
new skills and technologies relevant to your field of study.
○ Take initiative in asking questions, seeking clarification, and participating in
discussions with supervisors and colleagues.
5. Adaptability and Flexibility:
○ Adapt to the work environment and demonstrate flexibility in handling various
responsibilities and challenges that arise during your training.
○ Be open to different roles and tasks assigned to you, as this will broaden your
experience and skill set.

REGULATION 2023
DME 269
1020235773 C
Summer
Industrial Training
Vacation
Internship 2
6. Professionalism and Communication:

○ Communicate effectively with supervisors, colleagues, and clients as required.
Practice clear and concise verbal and written communication.
○ Demonstrate professionalism in all interactions, respecting confidentiality, and
adhering to company policies and procedures.
7. Safety and Compliance:
○ Prioritize safety at all times. Familiarize yourself with safety protocols,
procedures, and emergency exits in the workplace.
○ Follow all safety guidelines and regulations to ensure your well-being and that of
others around you.
After Completing Industrial Training:
8. Reflection and Documentation:
○ Reflect on your training experience. Evaluate what you have learned, the
challenges you faced, and how you have grown professionally.
○ Maintain a journal or log documenting your daily activities, achievements, and
lessons learned during the training period.
○ Seek feedback from your industry supervisor and faculty mentor on your
performance and areas for improvement.
○ Use constructive feedback to enhance your skills and competencies for future
career opportunities.
10. Career Planning:
○ Use your industrial training experience to inform your career planning and
decision-making process.
○ Discuss your career goals and aspirations with your faculty mentor or career
counselor for guidance on next steps after completing your diploma.
By following these instructions, Diploma engineering students can make the most of their
industrial training experience, gain valuable insights into their chosen field, and prepare
themselves effectively for future professional endeavors.

REGULATION 2023
DME 270
1020235773 C
Summer
Industrial Training
Vacation
Internship 2
Attendance Certification
Every student has to get their attendance certified by the industrial supervisor in the
prescribed form supplied to them. Students have also to put their signature on the form
and submit it to the institution faculty mentor.
Training Reports
The students have to prepare reports: The report in the form of a diary to be submitted to
the concerned faculty mentor of the institution. This will be reviewed while awarding
Internal assessment.
Industrial Training Diary
Students are required to maintain the record of day-to-day work done. Such a record is
called Industrial training Diary. Students have to write this report regularly. All days for
the week should be accounted for clearly giving attendance particulars (Presence,
absence, Leave, Holidays etc.). The concern of the Industrial supervisor is to periodically
check these progress reports.
In addition to the diary, students are required to submit a comprehensive report on
training with details of the organisation where the training was undergone after
attestation by the supervisors. The comprehensive report should incorporate study of
plant / product / process / construction along with intensive in-depth study on any one
of the topics such as processes, methods, tooling, construction and equipment,
highlighting aspects of quality, productivity and system. The comprehensive report
should be completed in the last week of Industrial training. Any data, drawings etc.
should be incorporated with the consent of the Organisation.

REGULATION 2023
DME 271
1020235773 C
Summer
Industrial Training
Vacation
Internship 2
Scheme of Evaluation
Internal Assessment
Students should be assessed for 40 Marks by industry supervisor and polytechnic faculty
mentor for the Internal Assessment.
Sl. No. Description Marks
A Punctuality and regularity. (Attendance) 10
B Level / proficiency of practical skills acquired. 10

Initiative in learning / working at site
C Self expression / communication skills. 10

Interpersonal skills / Human Relation.
D Report and Presentation. 10
Total 40
examiner appointed by the Chairman Board of Examinations after the completion of industrial
training. The marks scored will be converted to 60 marks for the End Semester Examination.
A Daily Activity Report and Attendance certificate. 20
B Comprehensive report on Internship, Relevant 30

Internship Certificate from the concerned
department.
C Presentation by the student at the end of the 30

Internship.
D Viva Voce 20
Total 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 272
2020235773 L T P C
Mini Project
PROJECT (Sandwich Course Only) 0 0 4 2
Introduction
Every student must do one mini project in the sandwich diploma program. Students can do their
project in Industry or R&D Lab or in-house or a combination of any two for the partial fulfillment
for the award of Diploma in Engineering.
For the project works, the Department will constitute a three-member faculty committee to
monitor the progress of the project and conduct reviews regularly.
If the projects are done in-house, the students must obtain the bonafide certificate for project
work from the Project supervisor and Head of the Department, at the end of the semester.
Students who have not obtained the bonafide certificate are not permitted to appear for the
Project Viva Voce examination.
For the projects carried out in Industry, the students must submit a separate certificate from
Industry apart from the regular bonafide certificate mentioned above. For Industry related
projects there must be one internal faculty advisor / Supervisor from Industry (External), this is
in addition to the regular faculty supervision.
The final examination for project work will be evaluated based on the final report submitted by
the project group of not exceeding four students, and the viva voce by an external examiner.
Objectives
Academic project work plays a crucial role in the education of Diploma in Engineering students,
as it helps them apply theoretical knowledge to practical situations and prepares them for
real-world engineering challenges.
● Integration of Knowledge: Consolidate and integrate theoretical knowledge acquired in
coursework to solve practical engineering problems.
● Skill Development: Enhance technical skills related to the specific field of engineering
through hands-on experience and application.
● Problem-Solving Abilities: Develop critical thinking and problem-solving abilities by
addressing complex engineering issues within a defined scope.
● Project Management: Gain experience in project planning, execution, and management,
including setting objectives, timelines, and resource allocation.

REGULATION 2023
DME 273
2020235773 L T P C
Mini Project
● Teamwork and Collaboration: Foster teamwork and collaboration by working in

multidisciplinary teams to achieve project goals and objectives.
● Research Skills: Acquire research skills by conducting literature reviews, gathering
relevant data, and applying research methodologies to investigate engineering problems.
● Innovation and Creativity: Encourage innovation and creativity in proposing and
developing engineering solutions that may be novel or improve upon existing methods.
● Communication Skills: Improve communication skills, both oral and written, by
presenting project findings, writing technical reports, and effectively conveying ideas to
stakeholders.
● Ethical Considerations: Consider ethical implications related to engineering practices,
including safety, environmental impact, and societal concerns.
● Professional Development: Prepare for future professional roles by demonstrating
professionalism, initiative, and responsibility throughout the project lifecycle.
Course Outcomes
CO 1: Demonstrate the ability to apply theoretical concepts and principles learned in
coursework to solve practical engineering problems encountered during the project.
CO 2: Develop and enhance technical skills specific to the field of engineering relevant to
the project, such as design, analysis, simulation, construction, testing, and
implementation.
CO 3: Apply critical thinking and problem-solving skills to identify, analyze, and propose
solutions to engineering challenges encountered throughout the project lifecycle.
CO 4: Acquire project management skills by effectively planning, organizing, and
executing project tasks within defined timelines and resource constraints.
CO 5: Improve communication skills through the preparation and delivery of project
reports, presentations, and documentation that effectively convey technical information
to stakeholders.

REGULATION 2023
DME 274
2020235773 L T P C
Mini Project
Important points to consider to select the mini project.

● Selecting a project work in Diploma Engineering is a significant decision that can greatly
influence your learning experience and future career prospects.
● Choose a project that aligns with your career aspirations and interests within the field of
engineering. Consider how the project can contribute to your professional development
and future opportunities.
● Ensure the project aligns with your coursework and specialization within the Diploma
program. It should complement and build upon the knowledge and skills you have
acquired in your studies.
● Evaluate the scope of the project to ensure it is manageable within the given timeframe,
resources, and constraints. Avoid projects that are overly ambitious or impractical to
complete effectively.
● Assess the availability of resources needed to conduct the project, such as equipment,
materials, laboratory facilities, and access to relevant software or tools. Lack of
resources can hinder project progress.
● Select a project that genuinely interests and motivates you. A project that captures your
curiosity and passion will keep you engaged and committed throughout the project
duration.
● Consider the availability and expertise of faculty advisors or industry mentors who can
provide guidance and support throughout the project. Effective mentorship is crucial for
success.
● Clearly define the learning objectives and expected outcomes of the project. Ensure that
the project will help you achieve specific learning goals related to technical skills,
problem-solving, and professional development.
● Look for opportunities to propose innovative solutions or explore new methodologies
within your project. Projects that encourage creativity can set you apart and enhance
your learning experience.

REGULATION 2023
DME 275
2020235773 L T P C
Mini Project
● Consider ethical implications related to the project, such as safety protocols,

environmental impact, and compliance with ethical guidelines in research and
engineering practices.
● Evaluate whether the project offers opportunities for collaboration with peers, experts
from other disciplines, or industry partners. Interdisciplinary projects can broaden your
perspective and enhance your teamwork skills.
● Consider the potential impact of your project on society or the engineering community.
Projects that address significant challenges or contribute to social good can be highly
fulfilling and make a meaningful difference.
By carefully considering these points, Diploma Engineering students can make informed
decisions when selecting project work that not only enhances their academic learning but also
prepares them for successful careers in engineering.
Duties Responsibilities of the internal faculty advisor.

Each group should have an internal faculty advisor assigned by the HOD/Principal.
● The project should be approved by the project monitoring committee constituted by the
Chairman Board of Examinations.
● The project should be selected in the sixth semester itself. Each project shall have a
maximum of four students in the project group.
● Provide comprehensive academic advising to help in the selection of appropriate project
that align with their interests and career goals.
● Offer expertise and feedback to ensure rigorous methodology, innovative approaches,
and meaningful contributions to the field.
● Assist in developing technical and professional skills through hands-on projects,
laboratory work, and practical applications of theoretical knowledge.
● Provide personal mentorship, fostering a supportive relationship that encourages
growth, resilience, and a positive academic experience.
● Facilitate connections between students and industry professionals, alumni, and other
relevant networks to enhance their professional opportunities and industry exposure.

REGULATION 2023
DME 276
2020235773 L T P C
Mini Project
● Ensure students have access to necessary resources, including research materials, lab
equipment, software, and academic literature.
● Regularly monitor and evaluate the progress of the project, providing constructive
feedback and guidance to help them stay on track and achieve their goals.
● Instill and uphold high ethical and professional standards, encouraging students to
practice integrity and responsibility in their work.
● Assist in preparing progress reports, writing recommendation letters, and facilitating
grant applications.
● Organize and participate in workshops, seminars, and other educational events that
enhance the learning experience and professional development .
● Address any issues or conflicts that arise, providing mediation and support to ensure a
positive and productive academic environment.
Instructions to the students.

● Regularly meet with your internal faculty advisor for guidance on academic progress,
research projects, and career planning. Be proactive in seeking advice and support from
your faculty advisor.
● Use planners, calendars, and task management tools to keep track of assignments,
project deadlines, and study schedules. Prioritize tasks to manage your time efficiently.
● Take advantage of opportunities to participate in projects and hands-on activities. These
experiences are crucial for applying your theoretical knowledge and gaining practical
skills.
● Focus on improving essential professional skills such as communication, teamwork,
problem-solving, and leadership. Participate in workshops and seminars that enhance
these competencies.
● Actively seek networking opportunities through industry events, seminars, and meetings.
Establish connections with peers, alumni, and professionals in your field to build a strong
professional network.

REGULATION 2023
DME 277
2020235773 L T P C
Mini Project
● Seek internships, co-op programs, or part-time jobs related to your field of study.
Real-world experience is invaluable for understanding industry practices and enhancing
your employability.
● Uphold high ethical standards in all your academic and professional activities. Practice
integrity, honesty, and responsibility. Adhere to the ethical guidelines and standards set
by your institution and the engineering profession.
● Adopt a mindset of lifelong learning. Stay updated with the latest developments and
trends in engineering by reading industry journals, attending conferences, and taking
additional courses.
Documents to be submitted by the student for a project.

Submit a printed report of your project work along with the fabrication model / analysis report
for the End Semester Examination.
Rubrics for Mini Project Work
Sl. Topics Description

No.
1 Objectives Clearly defined and specific objectives outlined.

Objectives align with the project's scope and purpose.
2 Literature Thorough review of relevant literature.

Review Identification of gaps and justification for the project's
contribution.
3 Research Clear explanation of the research design.

Design and Appropriateness and justification of chosen research methods.
Methodology

REGULATION 2023
DME 278
2020235773 L T P C
Mini Project
4 Project Adherence to project timeline and milestones.

Management Effective organization and planning evident in the project
execution.
5 Documentation Comprehensive documentation of project details.

Clarity and completeness in recording methods, results, and
challenges.
6 Presentation Clear and articulate communication of project findings.

Skills Effective use of visuals, if applicable.
7 Analysis and In-depth analysis of data.

Interpretation Clear interpretation of results in the context of research
questions.
8 Problem-Solving Demonstrated ability to identify and address challenges

encountered during the project.
Innovative solutions considered where applicable.
9 Professionalism Adherence to ethical standards in research.

and Compliance Compliance with project guidelines and requirements.
10 Quality of Work Overall quality and contribution of the project to the field.
Demonstrated effort to produce high-quality work.

REGULATION 2023
DME 279
2020235773 L T P C
Mini Project
The mark allocation for Internal and End Semester Viva Voce are as below.
Internal Mark Split (40 Marks)*
Review 1 Review 2 Review 3

(10 Marks) (15 Marks) (15 marks)
Committee: 5 Marks. Committee: 7.5 Marks Committee: 7.5 Marks

Supervisor: 5 Marks Supervisor: 7.5 Marks Supervisor: 7.5 Marks
Note: * The rubrics should be followed for the evaluation of the internal marks during reviews.
END SEMESTER EXAMINATION - Project Exam
The performance of each student in the project group would be evaluated in a viva voce
examination conducted by a committee consisting of an external examiner and the Department
project supervisor and an internal examiner.
End Semester (100)#
Record Presentation Viva Voce Model / Analysis

(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (20 Marks) Report
(40 Marks)
External: 10 External: 10 External: 10 External: 20

Internal: 5 Internal: 5 Internal: 5 Internal: 10
Supervisor: 5 Supervisor: 5 Supervisor: 5 Supervisor: 10
#
The marks scored will be converted to 60 Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 280
6000236111 L T P C
Advanced Engineering Mathematics
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Introduction
Mathematics is essential for engineering students to understand core engineering subjects. It
provides the framework for engineers to solve problems in engineering domains. This course is
designed to bridge the gap between diploma mathematics and B.E/B.Tech mathematics in
matrix algebra, differential calculus, vector calculus, differential equations, and Laplace
transforms.
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable the students to
1. Understand the concepts of eigen-values and eigen-vectors of matrices.
2. Learn the notation of partial differentiation and determine the extremities of functions of
two variables.
3. Acquire knowledge in vector calculus which is significantly used to solve engineering
problems.
4. Formulate and solve differential equations.
5. Understand Laplace transformation and its engineering applications.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Find eigenvalues and corresponding eigenvectors of a square matrix.
CO2: Apply the knowledge of partial differentiation to evaluate Jacobian and extremities of
two variable functions.
CO3: Evaluate the gradient of a scalar field and the divergence and curl of vector fields.
CO4: Solve ordinary differential equations using various techniques.
CO5: Use Laplace transforms to solve first-order ordinary differential equations.
Pre-requisites
Matrices, Determinants, Differentiation, Integration and Vector Algebra.

REGULATION 2023
DME 281
6000236111 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 3 2 1 1 1 3
● A theory-demonstrate-practice-activity strategy may be used to ensure that learning is

outcome-based.
● All demonstrations/Hands-on practices might be under a simulated environment.
● Use an inducto-deductive approach to achieve the desired learning objectives.
● Use open-ended questions to nurture the problem-solving and reasoning skills among
students.
● Support and guide the students for self-study.
● State the need for mathematics with engineering studies and provide real-life examples.

REGULATION 2023
DME 282
6000236111 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3

Examination
Quiz
Written test
Mode (Another Two
units)
Offline)
Exam Marks 50 50 60 100 100
Marks 15 5 20 60
Tentative
Schedule
(5 X 10 Marks = 50 Marks).
permitted.

REGULATION 2023
DME 283
6000236111 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents
Unit I EIGENVALUES AND EIGENVECTORS
Characteristic equation – Eigen-values of 2 × 2 and 3 × 3 real matrices – 7

Eigen-vectors of 2 × 2 real matrices – Properties of eigen-values (excluding
proof) – Cayley-Hamilton theorem (excluding proof) – Simple problems.
Unit II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES
Partial derivatives of two variable and three variable functions (up to second order) 7
– Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem (excluding proof) – Jacobian
matrix and determinant – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables –
Simple problems.
Unit III VECTOR CALCULUS
Scalar field and Vector field – Vector differential operator – Gradient of a scalar 7
field – Directional derivative – Divergence and curl of a vector field (excluding
properties) – Solenoidal and irrotational vector fields – Simple problems.

REGULATION 2023
DME 284
6000236111 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Unit IV DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
Differential equation – Formation – Order and degree – Solution of a differential 7

equation – Equations of first order and first degree – Variable separable method –
Leibnitz’s Linear equations – Second order equations of the form
(𝑎𝐷2 + 𝑏𝐷 + 𝑐)𝑦 = 𝑒𝑛𝑥 where 𝑎, 𝑏, 𝑐 and 𝑛 are constants and the auxiliary
2
equation 𝑎𝑚 + 𝑏𝑚 + 𝑐 = 0 has only real roots) – Complementary function –
Particular integral – General solution – Simple problems.
Unit V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS
Definition of Laplace transform – Laplace transforms of standard functions - 7

Linearity and change of scale property (excluding proofs) – First shifting property
– Laplace transforms of derivatives – Properties (excluding proofs) – Inverse
Laplace transforms – Properties (excluding proofs) – Solving first order ordinary
differential equation using Laplace transforms – Simple problems.
Revision + Test 10
TOTAL HOURS 45

● Demonstrate the applications of eigen-values in stability analysis, decouple of
three-phase systems and vibration analysis.
● Demonstrate maxima and minima of two variable functions using GeoGebra graphing
calculator.
● Demonstrate solenoidal vector field and irrotational vector field using engineering
applications.
● Demonstrate the applications of differential equations in solving engineering problems.
● Presentation /Seminars by students.
● Quizzes.

REGULATION 2023
DME 285
6000236111 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Reference Books:
1. John Bird, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Routledge, 9th Edition, 2021.
2. Grewal, B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 42nd Edition, 2012.
3. Arumugam, S., Thangapandi Isaac, A., & Somasundaram, A., Differential Equations and
Applications, Yes Dee Publishing Pvt. Ltd., 2020.
4. Duraipandian, P., & Kayalal Pachaiyappa, Vector Analysis, S Chand and Company Limited,
2014.
5. Narayanan, S., & Manicavachagom Pillai T.K., Calculus Volume I and II, .Viswanathan
Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 2007.
Web Reference
1. https://www.khanacademy.org/math/
2. https://www.mathportal.org/
3. https://openstax.org/subjects/math/
4. https://www.mathhelp.com/
5. https://www.geogebra.org/
6. https://www.desmos.com/
7. https://phet.colorado.edu/
Duration: 3 Hours. Maximum Marks: 100

Note: Answer Ten questions by selecting Two questions from each unit. Each question carries
10 marks.
Instruction to the question setters.
Each unit should have four questions. Each question carries 10 Marks. Each question may have
two subdivisions only.

REGULATION 2023
DME 286
6000236112 L T P C
Entrepreneurship
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Introduction
Development of a diploma curriculum is a dynamic process responsive to the society and
reflecting the needs and aspirations of its learners. Fast changing society deserves changes in
educational curriculum particularly to establish relevance to emerging socio-economic
environments; to ensure equity of opportunity and participation and finally promote concern
for excellence. In this context the course on entrepreneurship and start ups aims at instilling
and stimulating human urge for excellence by realizing individual potential for generating and
putting to use the inputs relevant to social prosperity and thereby ensuring good means of living
for every individual, providing jobs and developing the Indian economy.
Course Objectives
After completing this subject, the student will be able to
● Acquire entrepreneurial spirit and resourcefulness
● Familiarize Acquire knowledge about the business idea and product selection
● Analyze the banking and financial institutions
● Understand the pricing policy and cost analysis
● Get knowledge about the business plan preparation
Course Outcomes
CO1: Explain the process of entrepreneurship
CO2: Analyse the importance of generation of ideas and product selection
CO3: Familiarization of various financial and non financial schemes
CO4: Acquire various cost components to arrive pricing of the product
CO5: Learn the preparation of project feasibility report
Pre-requisites
Knowledge of basics of Engineering and Industrial engineering

REGULATION 2023
DME 287
6000236112 L T P C
Entrepreneurship
THEORY 3 0 0 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 - - - - 3 1 3
CO2 - - - - 3 3 3
CO3 - - - 1 - 3 2
CO4 - 1 3 3 2 3 2
CO5 - 2 3 3 3 3 3
● Real-World Relevance: Incorporate relatable, real-life examples and applications to
help students understand and appreciate course concepts.
● Interactive Learning: Utilize demonstrations and plan interactive student activities for
an engaging learning experience.
● Application-Based Learning: Employ a theory-demonstrate-practice- activity strategy
● Simulation and Real-World Practice: Conduct demonstrations and hands-on activities
in a simulated environment, transitioning to real- world scenarios when possible.

REGULATION 2023
DME 288
6000236112 L T P C
Entrepreneurship
THEORY 3 0 0 3

Examination
Quiz
Written test
Mode (Another Two
units)
Offline)
Exam Marks 50 50 60 100 100
Marks 15 5 20 60
Tentative
Schedule
permitted.

REGULATION 2023
DME 289
6000236112 L T P C
Entrepreneurship
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents
Unit I Entrepreneurship – Introduction and Process
Concept of entrepreneurship - Importance, Myths about Entrepreneurship, Pros and 7

Cons of Entrepreneurship, Process of Entrepreneurship, , Competencies and
characteristics of an entrepreneur -, Ethical Entrepreneurship, Entrepreneurial
Values and Attitudes, Creativity, Innovation and entrepreneurship- Entrepreneurs - as
problem solvers, Mindset of an employee and an entrepreneur, - Risk
Taking-Concepts
Unit II Business Idea
Types of Business: Manufacturing, Trading and Services, Stakeholders: sellers, 7

vendors and consumers and Competitors, E- commerce Business Models, business
idea generation -Types of Resources - Human, Capital and Entrepreneurial tools and
resources, etc.,- setting business goals- Patent, copyright and Intellectual property
rights, Customer Relations and Vendor Management, -Business Ideas vs. Business
Opportunities, Opportunity – SWOT ANALYSIS of a business idea - Business Failure
– causes and remedies.- Types of business risks,

REGULATION 2023
DME 290
6000236112 L T P C
Entrepreneurship
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Unit III Banking
Size and capital based classification of business enterprises- Role of financial 7

institutions, Role of Government policy, Entrepreneurial support systems, Incentive
schemes for state government, and Incentive schemes for Central governments.
Unit IV Pricing and Cost Analysis
Types of Costs - Variable - Fixed- Operational Costs - Break Even Analysis - for 7
single product or service, -financial Business Case Study, Understand the meaning
and concept of the term Cash Inflow and Cash Outflow- Pricing- Calculate Per Unit
Cost of a single product, , Understand the importance and preparation of Income
Statement, Prepare a Cash Flow Projection- Factors affecting pricing.- GST.
Unit V Business Plan Preparation
Feasibility Report – Technical analysis, financial analysis- Market Research - 7

Concept, Importance and Process- tools for market research- Market Sensing and
Testing, Marketing and Sales strategy, Digital marketing, Branding - Business name,
logo, tag line, Promotion strategy, Business Plan Preparation, -Concept and
Importance, , Execution of Business Plan.
Revision + Test 10
TOTAL HOURS 45
Suggested list of Students Activity.
1. Students can explore app development or web design. They’ll learn about technology,
user experience, and marketing.
2. Hosting events, workshops, or conferences allows students to practice project
management, networking, and marketing skills.
3. Encourage students to address social or environmental issues through innovative
business solutions. This fosters empathy and creativity.

REGULATION 2023
DME 291
6000236112 L T P C
Entrepreneurship
THEORY 3 0 0 3
4. Part of entrepreneurship clubs or organizations provides networking opportunities,

mentorship, and exposure to real-world challenges.
5. Competitions like business plan contests or pitch events allow students to showcase
their ideas and receive feedback.
6. Students can create and sell handmade crafts, artwork, or other products. This teaches
them about production, pricing, and customer relations.
7. Students can provide consulting services in areas they’re knowledgeable about, such as
social media marketing or financial planning.
8. Encourage students to create and manage their own small business or offer freelance
services. This hands-on experience helps them understand various aspects of
entrepreneurship.
1. G.K. Varshney, Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship, Sahitya Bhawan Publications, Agra.,
2019.
2. H.Nandan, Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall India Learning Private
Limited, Third Edition, 2013.
3. R.K. Singal, Entrepreneurship Development & Management, S K Kataria and Sons,
2013.
Web Reference:
● https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/15-390-new-enterprises-spring-2013/resources/lecture-1/
● https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_ge08/preview

10 marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 292
6000236113 L T P C
Project Management
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Introduction
Project management is the systematic application of knowledge, skills, tools, and techniques to
project activities to meet specific project requirements. It involves planning, organizing, and
managing resources to achieve project goals within defined scope, time, and budget
constraints. Project management encompasses several key processes and phases, including
initiation, planning, execution, monitoring and controlling, and closing. It is essential across
various industries to ensure projects are completed successfully, efficiently, and effectively,
aligning with organizational objectives and stakeholder expectations. Project managers play a
crucial role in leading teams, managing risks, ensuring quality, and communicating with
stakeholders to drive project success.
Course Objectives
After completing this subject, the student will be able,
● To understand the concept, characteristics and elements of projects.
● To understand the stages in Project Life Cycle.
● To appreciate the need for Project Portfolio Management System.
● To know the considerations in choosing appropriate project management structure.
● To understand the components of techno-economic feasibility studies.
● To know about the detailed project report
● To learn about project constraints.
● To understand the techniques of evaluation.
● To get insight into the Social Cost Benefit Analysis Method.
● To know how to construct project networks using PERT and CPM.
● To learn how to crash project networks
● To understand the meaning of project appraisal.
● To understand the meaning of project audits.
● To know the qualities of an effective project manager.
● To understand the stages in the Team Development model.

REGULATION 2023
DME 293
6000236113 L T P C
Project Management
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Course Outcomes
CO 1: Explain the principles of Project Management
CO 2: Create and manage project schedules.
CO 3: Create structure and manage the project commitments.
CO 4: Acquire to Gain enterprise support.
CO 5: Prepare a Detailed Project Report (DPR).
Pre-requisites
Basic Knowledge.
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 - - - - 3 1
CO2 3 - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 - - 1 1 3 1
CO4 3 - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 - - 1 1 3 1

REGULATION 2023
DME 294
6000236113 L T P C
Project Management
THEORY 3 0 0 3
to learn.
projects.
possible.

Examination
Quiz
Written test
Mode (Another Two
units)
Offline)
Exam Marks 50 50 60 100 100
Marks 15 5 20 60
Tentative
Schedule

REGULATION 2023
DME 295
6000236113 L T P C
Project Management
THEORY 3 0 0 3
permitted.
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents
Unit I Project Management – An Overview, Project Portfolio Management System

and Structure, Steps in Defining Project and Project Delays
Project – Classification – Importance of Project Management – An Integrated 7

Approach – Project Portfolio Management System – The Need – Choosing the
appropriate Project Management Structure: Organizational considerations and
project considerations – steps in defining the project – project Rollup – Process

REGULATION 2023
DME 296
6000236113 L T P C
Project Management
THEORY 3 0 0 3
breakdown structure – Responsibility Matrices – External causes of delay and

internal constraints.
Unit II Various Stages and Components of Project Feasibility Studies, Phases of a

Project, Stages in Project Life Cycle and Project Constraints
Project feasibility studies - Opportunity studies, General opportunity studies, specific 7

opportunity studies, pre-feasibility studies, functional studies or support studies,
feasibility study – components of project feasibility studies – Managing Project
resources flow – project planning to project completion: Pre-investment phase,
Investment Phase and operational phase – Project Life Cycle – Project constraints.
Unit III Project Evaluation under Certainty and Uncertainty, Project Evaluation,
Commercial and Social Cost Benefit Analysis
Project Evaluation under certainty - Net Present Value (Problems - Case Study), 7
Benefit Cost Ratio, Internal Rate of Return, Urgency, Payback Period, ARR – Project
Evaluation under uncertainty – Methodology for project evaluation – Commercial vs.
National Profitability – Social Cost Benefit Analysis, Commercial or National
Profitability, social or national profitability.
Unit IV Developing Project Network using PERT and CPM, Project Appraisal and
Control Process.
Developing a Project Plan - Developing the Project Network – Constructing a Project 7

Network (Problems) – PERT – CPM – Crashing of Project Network (Problems - Case
Study) – Resource Leveling and Resource Allocation – how to avoid cost and time
overruns – Steps in Project Appraisal Process – Project Control Process – Control
Issues – Project Audits – the Project Audit Process – project closure – team, team
member and project manager evaluations.

REGULATION 2023
DME 297
6000236113 L T P C
Project Management
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Unit V Project Managing Versus Leading of Project, Qualities of Project Manager and
Managing Project Teams, Team Building Models and Performance Teams and
Team Pitfalls.
Managing versus leading a project - managing project stakeholders – social network 7

building (Including management by wandering around) – qualities of an effective
project manager – managing project teams – Five Stage Team Development Model
– Situational factors affecting team development – project team pitfalls.
Revision + Test 10
TOTAL HOURS 45

Project Simulation and Role-Playing:
● Activity: Participate in simulated project scenarios where students take on different roles
within a project team (e.g., project manager, team member, stakeholder).
● Purpose: This helps students understand the dynamics of project management,
including leadership, communication, and team collaboration.
Case Study Analysis:
● Activity: Analyze real-world case studies of successful and failed projects.
● Purpose: This activity enables students to apply theoretical knowledge to practical
situations, identify best practices, and learn from the challenges and solutions
implemented in real projects.
Project Plan Development:
● Activity: Develop a comprehensive project plan for a hypothetical or real project,
including scope, schedule, budget, risk management, and quality management plans.
● Purpose: This allows students to practice creating detailed and structured project plans,
honing their skills in planning and organizing project activities.

REGULATION 2023
DME 298
6000236113 L T P C
Project Management
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Group Project:
● Activity: Work in teams to manage a project from initiation to closure, simulating a real
project environment.
● Purpose: Group projects help students learn how to work collaboratively, manage group
dynamics, and apply project management tools and techniques in a team setting.
Project Management Software Training:
● Activity: Gain hands-on experience with project management software such as Microsoft
Project, Asana, or Trello.
● Purpose: This activity equips students with practical skills in using technology to plan,
track, and manage project tasks and resources efficiently.
Reference Books:
1. Clifford F. Gray And Erik W. Larson, Project Management – The Managerial Process, Tata
Mcgraw Hill.
2. Dragan Z. Milosevic, Project Management Toolbox: Tools And Techniques For The
Practicing Project Manager,
3. Gopalakrishnan, P/ Ramamoorthy, V E, Textbook Of Project Management, Macmillan
India. Ltd.
4. Harold Kerzner, Project Management: A Systems Approach To Planning, Scheduling, And
Controlling, Eighth Edition, John Wiley & Sons
5. Jason Charvat, Project Management Methodologies: Selecting, Implementing, And
Supporting Methodologies And Processes For Projects, John Wiley & Sons
6. Kevin Forsberg, Ph.D, Hal Mooz, Visualizing Project Management: A Model For Business
And Technical Success, Second Edition, Pmp And Howard Cotterman, John Wiley &
Sons.
Web Reference
https://youtu.be/pc9nvBsXsuM
NPTEL Courses
https://youtu.be/PqQqTAu_FiM

REGULATION 2023
DME 299
6000236113 L T P C
Project Management
THEORY 3 0 0 3

10 marks.


REGULATION 2023
DME 300
6000236114 L T P C
Finance Fundamentals
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Introduction
This course gives a deep insight into the finance fundamentals such as money management
and the process of acquiring needed funds. It also encompasses the oversight, creation, and
study of money, banking, credit, investments, assets, liabilities that make up financial systems
and improves overall financial literacy.
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to
1. Identify different ways to save money for future
2. Understand various techniques to raise capital
3. Get acquainted with the essential terminologies used in finance language
4. Get exposed to different types of budgeting
5. Instill the concept of costing and its impact on profitability
Course Outcomes
CO1: Manage financial resources effectively to achieve personal goals
CO2: Explain the procedure for Business Funding
CO3: Exhibit financial literacy through the usage of different terminologies appropriate
to the context
CO4: Differentiate the types of budgeting and allocate the resources
CO5: Apply the idea of marginal costing in decision making
Pre-requisites
Knowledge of basic mathematics

REGULATION 2023
DME 301
6000236114 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 - - - 1 - 2
CO2 3 - - - 1 - 2
CO3 3 - - - 1 - 2
CO4 3 - - - 1 - 2
CO5 3 - - 1 - 2
● Real-World Relevance: Incorporate relatable, real-life examples and applications to
help students understand and appreciate course concepts.
● Interactive Learning: Utilize demonstrations and plan interactive student activities for
an engaging learning experience.
● Application-Based Learning: Employ a theory-demonstrate-practice- activity strategy
● Simulation and Real-World Practice: Conduct demonstrations and hands-on activities
in a simulated environment, transitioning to real- world scenarios when possible.

REGULATION 2023
DME 302
6000236114 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3

Examination
Quiz
Written test
Mode (Another Two
units)
Offline)
Exam Marks 50 50 60 100 100
Marks 15 5 20 60
Tentative
Schedule
permitted.

REGULATION 2023
DME 303
6000236114 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents
UNIT I Personal Finance
Personal Finance – Meaning, Objectives and advantages – Individual Perspective – 7

Family Perspective – Time Value of Money – Personal Savings: Meaning, Different
modes of Saving – Bank Deposit, Online Investments, Insurance, Stocks, Gold, Real
Estate – Returns Vs Risk – Financial Discipline – Setting Alerts for commitments
(With Real time Examples).
UNIT II Business Funding
Sources: Personal Savings – Borrowings - Venture Capital – Venture Capital Process 7

– Commercial Banks – Government Grants and Scheme.
UNIT III Finance language
Capital – Drawing – Income – Expenditure – Revenue Vs Capital Items – Assets – 7

Fixed Assets – Current Assets – Fictitious Assets – Liabilities – Long-term
Liabilities – Current Liabilities – Internal Liabilities – External Liabilities –

REGULATION 2023
DME 304
6000236114 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Shareholders fund: Equity Share capital, Preference Share Capital, Reserve & Surplus
– Borrowings: Debentures, Bank Loan, Other Loan – Depreciation – Reserve Vs
Provision.
UNIT IV Budgeting
Budgetary Control – Meaning – Preparation of various budgets – Purchase budget 7

– Sales Budget – Production budget – Cash Budget – Flexible budgets.
(With Problems)
UNIT V Marginal Costing
Marginal Costing – Meaning – Marginal Costing Vs Absorption Costing – Concepts 7

of Variable Cost, Fixed Cost and Contribution – PV Ratio – Break Even Point –
Margin of Safety – Key Factor – Application of Marginal Costing in decision making
– Make or Buy – Shutdown or Continue – Exploring New Markets (With Problems)
Revision + Test 10

Financial Statement Analysis:
● Activity: Analyze and interpret financial statements, including balance sheets, income
statements, and cash flow statements of different companies.
● Purpose: This activity helps students understand the financial health and performance of
organizations, developing skills in financial analysis and critical thinking.
Investment Portfolio Management:
● Activity: Create and manage a simulated investment portfolio, making decisions on
asset allocation, stock selection, and diversification.
● Purpose: This allows students to apply theoretical concepts in a practical setting,
learning how to evaluate investment opportunities and manage financial risk.

REGULATION 2023
DME 305
6000236114 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Case Study Analysis:

● Activity: Examine real-world case studies involving financial decisions made by
companies, such as capital budgeting, mergers and acquisitions, and financial
restructuring.
● Purpose: Case studies provide insights into the application of finance principles in
business scenarios, enhancing problem-solving and decision-making skills.
Classroom Discussions and Debates:
● Activity: Participate in discussions and debates on current financial issues, market
trends, and economic policies.
● Purpose: Engaging in discussions helps students stay informed about the latest
developments in finance, develop their communication skills, and form well-rounded
opinions on financial matters.
Reference Books:
1. Banking Theory, Law & Practice - Dr.L.Natarajan, Margham Publications.
2. Corporate Accounting by T.S.Reddy and Dr.A.Murthy, Margham Publications.
3. Management Accounting by T.S.Reddy and Dr.Y.Hariprasd Reddy, Margham Publications.
4. Cost Accounting by T.S.Reddy and Dr.Y.Hariprasd Reddy, Margham Publications.

10 marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 306
1020236115 L T P C
Industry 4.0
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Introduction
Industry 4.0, also known as the Fourth Industrial Revolution, represents the current trend of
automation and data exchange in manufacturing technologies. It integrates advanced
technologies such as artificial intelligence (AI), the Internet of Things (IoT), cloud computing,
and big data analytics to create "smart factories" that are highly efficient and adaptive.
Industry 4.0 is transforming the manufacturing landscape by leveraging advanced technologies
to create more efficient, flexible, and intelligent production processes. For diploma engineering
students, understanding these concepts is crucial as they will play a key role in the future of
engineering and manufacturing. Learning Industry 4.0 will not only enhance your technical skills
but also prepare you for the evolving job market in the digital age.
Course Objectives
● To understand the basics of Technology of Industry 4.0 and IoT
● To learn about the Artificial Intelligence and Application Domains
● To study Robotic Process Automation and programming.
● To understand the Augmented & Virtual Reality and its applications
● To learn and evolution of IoT, Sensors, and Actuators
Course Outcomes
CO1: Describe the Industry 4.0 technology and Industrial Internet of Things
CO2: Explain the Artificial Intelligence (AI) and Future Prospects of AI.
CO3: Explain Robotic Process Automation (RPA) for Manufacturing Industry
CO4: Describe Augmented & Virtual Reality and its Applications.
CO5: Explain the applications of IoT, Sensors, and Actuators in industries
Pre-requisites
Basic Knowledge of Industry 4.0 and its Applications

REGULATION 2023
DME 307
1020236115 L T P C
Industry 4.0
THEORY 3 0 0 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 1 1
CO2 3 1 1
CO3 3 1 1
CO4 3 1 1
CO5 3 1 1

Examination
Quiz
Written test
Mode (Another Two
units)
Offline)
Exam Marks 50 50 60 100 100
Marks 15 5 20 60
Tentative
Schedule

REGULATION 2023
DME 308
1020236115 L T P C
Industry 4.0
THEORY 3 0 0 3
permitted.
Question Pattern:
marks each.

REGULATION 2023
DME 309
1020236115 L T P C
Industry 4.0
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Syllabus Contents
Unit I: Introduction to Industry 4.0
Need – Reason for Adopting Industry 4.0 - Definition – Goals and Design 7
Principles - Technologies of Industry 4.0 – Big Data – Artificial Intelligence (AI) –
Industrial Internet of Things - Cyber Security – Cloud – Augmented Reality.
Unit II: Artificial Intelligence
Artificial Intelligence: Artificial Intelligence (AI) – What & Why? - History of AI - 7

Foundations of AI -The AI - Environment - Societal Influences of AI - Application
Domains and Tools - Associated Technologies of AI - Future Prospects of AI -
Challenges of AI.
Unit III: Robotic Process Automation (RPA)
Robotic Process Automation (RPA): Introduction to RPA – Need for automation – 7

Programming constructs in RPA – Robots and Softbots – RPA architecture and
process methodologies - Industries best suited for RPA - Risks & Challenges with
RPA.
Unit IV: Augmented & Virtual Reality
Augmented Reality: Definition - Tools for Augmented Reality – Hololens - 7

Advantages and Challenges of AR - Applications of AR in Education, Industries -
Mixed Reality.
Virtual Reality: Definition – Types of Head Mounted Displays – Tools for Virtual
Reality – Applications of VR in Education, Industries - Difference between VR and
AR.

REGULATION 2023
DME 310
1020236115 L T P C
Industry 4.0
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Unit V: IoT, Sensors and Actuators
Evolution of IoT – Definition & Characteristics of IoT - Architecture of IoT – 7

Technologies for IoT – Developing IoT Applications – Applications of IoT –
Industrial IoT – Security in IoT
Analog and Digital Sensors – Interfacing temperature sensor, ultrasound sensor
and infrared (IR) sensor with Arduino – Interfacing LED and Buzzer with Arduino.
Assessment Test and Revision with Student activity 10
Total 45
Textbook:
1. Sudip Misra, Chandana roy, and Anandarup Mukherjee, Introduction to Industrial Internet
of Things and Industry 4.0, Taylor & Francis India, 2021.
2. Dr Anand Kumar Singh and Dr. Manish Gangil, INDUSTRY 4.0, Shashwat Publication,
2022.
3. Alasdair Gilchrist, Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things, 1st Edition, Apress,
2017.
4. Dr Kamlesh Lakhwani, Dr Hemant Kumar Gianey, Joseph Kofi Wireko, and Kamal Kant
Hiran, Internet of Things (IoT), First Edition, BPB Publications, 2020.

● https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLbRMhDVUMngdcLdH4-YF1uJI4IuhcDZPR

REGULATION 2023
DME 311
1020236115 L T P C
Industry 4.0
THEORY 3 0 0 3



REGULATION 2023
DME 312
1020236116 L T P C
Additive Manufacturing
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Introduction
This course is mainly designed to have a complete knowledge about Additive Manufacturing
technologies which is a main component among the nine pillars of Industrie 4.0. This course is
suitable for students opting for any pathway under Diploma in Mechanical Engineering stream.
This course enhances the technical skills of students such as newer product design, testing and
validation, problem solving, innovation, etc.
Course Objectives
1. To impart the knowledge of construction and working principles of additive
manufacturing technologies, and their potential applications in design and
manufacturing.
2. To familiarise with the materials used in AM processes and their applications
Course Outcomes
CO1: Explain the additive manufacturing technologies and rapid prototyping

CO2: Acquire the CAD model generation procedure for the AM processes
CO3: Explain extrusion and sheet metal based AM processes
CO4: Describe photo polymerization and powder based AM processes
CO5: Enlighten the various applications of AM processes
Pre-requisites
Knowledge of basic Science, Manufacturing Processes, Machine Tool Technology

REGULATION 2023
DME 313
1020236116 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 1 1
CO3 3 1 1
CO4 3 1 1
CO5 3 1 1 1
● Prepare case study problems to the realistic situations, and real-world examples to make
the sessions engaging.
● Additive Manufacturing processes can be displayed via online or offline mode to gain the
interest for this course.
● Different methods of teaching such as debate and discussions can be used to enhance
the students' centric learning.
● Organise demo sessions on the 3D printing machines that are available in the institution
or can be call some vendor for giving demos

REGULATION 2023
DME 314
1020236116 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3

Examination
Quiz
Written test
Mode (Another Two
units)
Offline)
Exam Marks 50 50 60 100 100
Marks 15 5 20 60
Tentative
Schedule
permitted.

REGULATION 2023
DME 315
1020236116 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents
Unit I Introduction to Additive Manufacturing (AM)
Additive Manufacturing - Overview – Need – History – Classification – working 6

principles (concepts only) - Materials for AM – PLA, ABS, PMMA, ceramics,
composites and liquid resins – AM processes - Advantages, Limitations and
Challenges– Rapid Prototyping – Rapid Tooling.
Unit II Design for Additive Manufacturing
Basic concept – CAD model preparation - file formats - Part orientation – Support 6
material generation – Model slicing – honeycomb structure - Digitization techniques
– Model reconstruction – Slicing software - Reverse Engineering – RE application in
AM.
Unit III Extrusion and Sheet metal based Processes
Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM) – construction, working principle, advantages – 6

process parameters involved - Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM) –

REGULATION 2023
DME 316
1020236116 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
construction, working principle, advantages - gluing and adhesive bonding - PolyJet -

construction, working principle, advantages.
Unit IV Photo polymerization and Powder based Processes
Stereolithography process (SLA) – construction, photo curable materials, working 6

principle, advantages – Selective Laser Sintering (SLS) - construction, working
principle, advantages – Electron Beam Melting (EBM) - construction, working
principle, advantages – Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS) - construction,
working principle, advantages.
Unit V Applications of Additive Manufacturing
Applications of Additive manufacturing technologies – new product development - 6

after sales and service - automobile, aerospace, consumer products, health care
industries – customized implants, bio-organs, bio-bones, etc.
Assessment Test and Revision with Student activity 15
Total 45

● Selected topics which are relatively simpler or descriptive in nature should be given to
the students for self-learning and assess the development of competency through
classroom presentations.
● Mini-projects may be given to a group of students for hand-on experiences.
● Massive open online courses (MOOCs) may be used to teach various topics/subtopics.

REGULATION 2023
DME 317
1020236116 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Reference Books:
1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”,
Third Edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010.
2. Gebhardt A., “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003.
3. Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press, 2007.
4. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006.
5. Hilton P.D. and Jacobs P.F., “Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications”,
CRC press, 2000.
6. Tom Page “Design for Additive Manufacturing” LAP Lambert Academic Publishing, 2012.
Web Reference
What is 3D printing? How does a 3D printer work? Learn 3D printing
3D Printing - Applications, Types, Process, Advantages (vajiramandravi.com)
How a 3D Printer Works and What It Is Used for (spiceworks.com)
What is 3D Printing? - Technology Definition and Types - TWI (twi-global.com)
https://home.iitk.ac.in/~nsinha/Additive_Manufacturing%20I.pdf
https://web.mit.edu/tdp/www/whatis3dp.html
Briefing Note (birmingham.ac.uk)



REGULATION 2023
DME 318
1020236117 L T P C
Power Plant Engineering
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Introduction
Electrical power is the main resource for any type of industry. Economic growth of the nation
essentially results in growth in the power sector. Various conventional power plants such as
Hydro, Gas, Thermal, Diesel and Nuclear power plants are employed for power generation. Most
of the power plants use Mechanical Engineering equipment and components. Hence, this
course attempts to provide the basic knowledge of the components, operation and maintenance
of power plants to the students and would also acquaint them with the latest technological
advances taking place in this sector.
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable the student to apply knowledge of mechanical
engineering related to power generation systems, their control and economics in different types
of power plants for their operation and maintenance.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Analyze economics of power plants and list factors affecting the power plants and
interpret the performance of power plants based on load variations
CO2: Identify elements and their functions and operation of thermal power plants.
CO3: Identify elements and their functions of hydro, Solar and wind power plant.
CO4: Identify elements and their functions and operations of nuclear power plants
CO5: Identify elements and their functions and operations of diesel and gas turbine
power plants
Pre-requisites
Knowledge of Mathematics, Thermal Engineering, Mechanics of machines, Workshop
technology, Fluid mechanics and fluid power.

REGULATION 2023
DME 319
1020236117 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 1 1 1 2 3 3 3
CO2 1 2 1 2 3 3 3
CO3 2 2 1 1 3 3 3
CO4 1 1 1 2 2 3 3
CO5 1 2 1 2 2 3 3
1. The instructional strategy for teaching Powerplant Engineering in polytechnic colleges
emphasizes practical application and industry relevance.
2. Through a curriculum aligned with the state technical education board, the syllabus is
broken down into manageable units, prioritizing topics pertinent to Indian engineering
contexts.
3. About 15 – 20% of the topics/ sub-topics which are relatively simpler or descriptive in
nature is to be given to the students for self-directed learning and assess the
development of the Cos through classroom presentations.
4. Before starting practical, the teacher should demonstrate the working of a power plant.
5. Show video/ animation films to explain the functioning of various power plants.

REGULATION 2023
DME 320
1020236117 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3

Examination
Quiz
Written test
Mode (Another Two
units)
Offline)
Exam Marks 50 50 60 100 100
Marks 15 5 20 60
Tentative
Schedule
permitted.

REGULATION 2023
DME 321
1020236117 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
Question Pattern:
marks each.
Syllabus Contents
Unit I INTRODUCTION & ECONOMICS OF POWER PLANT
Power plant-Introduction, Classification - Location of power plant- Choice of Power 7

plant-Terminology used in power plant: Peak load, Base load, Load factor, Load
curve, demand factor- Various factor affecting the operation of power plant- Load
sharing- cost of power tariff methods-factors involved in fixing of a tariff.
UNIT II THERMAL POWER PLANT
Thermal power plant -General layout – working-Site Selection– materials required 7

for thermal power plant - High Pressure Boilers and classification - coal handling and
its methods, stages in coal storage- Fuel burning-Stoker firing-overfeed stoker
–underfeed stokers-chain grate stoker, Pulverized fuel handling system-
Pulverization of coal-Ash handling system- Gravity system- electrostatic
precipitation (ESP) system-Advantages and disadvantages-limitations of Thermal
power plant.

REGULATION 2023
DME 322
1020236117 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3
UNIT III POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY
Hydroelectric power plant- Introduction, storage and poundage, Selection of sites for 7
hydroelectric power plant-General layout and essential elements of Hydroelectric
power plant and its working- Advantages and limitations of hydroelectric power
plant. Solar power plant-Introduction-layout, Solar cell fundamentals & classification
– maximum power point tracker (MPPT) and solar panel. Wind power plant:
Introduction, -Factors affecting distribution of Wind energy, Variation of wind speed
with height and time-Horizontal axis wind turbine (HAWT)-types of rotors-Vertical
axis wind turbine- types of rotors- advantages and limitations of Wind power plant.
UNIT IV NUCLEAR POWER PLANT
Nuclear power plant-introduction-nuclear fuels, nuclear fission and fusion, working 7

of a nuclear power plant, types of reactors- pressurized water reactor- boiling water
reactor- CANDU type reactor – fast breeder reactor - effect of nuclear radiation-
different methods for nuclear waste disposal-low, medium and high-level waste
disposal, Advantages -disadvantages- limitations- Safety measures for Nuclear
Power plants.
UNIT V DIESEL POWER PLANT AND GAS TURBINE POWER PLANT
Diesel power plant- layout -Components and the working- Advantages 7

-disadvantages- limitations. Gas turbine power plant- Schematic diagram & working
of open and closed cycle gas turbine power plant, Components of Gas
turbine–compressor, combustion chamber, gas turbine, vortex blading, gas turbine
fuels, Gas turbine power plants in India- Advantages -disadvantages- limitations of
Gas turbine power plant.
Revision + Test 10
Total 45

REGULATION 2023
DME 323
1020236117 L T P C
THEORY 3 0 0 3

Other than classroom learning, the following are the suggested student related co-curricular
course.
1. Students are advised to visit a nearby power plant to understand more about the subject
and prepare a report consisting of
a) Various advanced systems
b) Various Standards
c) Maintenance of components of power plant observed
2. Prepare/ Download the specifications of followings:
a) Steam Power plant equipment and elements
b) Gas turbine Power plant equipment and elements
c) Hydro Power plant equipment and elements
d) Diesel Power plant equipment and elements
Reference Books:
1. Power plant engineering, G. R. Nagpal, Khanna publishers.
2. Power plant engineering, Arora and Domkundwar, Dhanpat rai & CO (P) LTD.
3. Power Plant Engineering, Dr. P. C. Sharma, S. K. Kataria & Sons Publications.
4. Power plant engineering, P. K. Nag, McGraw Hill India.
5. A Text Book of Power Plant Engineering, R K Rajput, Laxmi Publications.
Web reference
● https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLLy_2iUCG87BT8H9uMufjrcPF5e6Qd2bz
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3dJAtHaSQ98
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kbuLfXgw4Gs
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=68-o35vWTAc
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vrp0ptd03mg


REGULATION 2023
DME 324
1020236241 L T P C
MEP Equipment Servicing
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
MEP Equipment servicing is required in a large number of commercial and industrial
applications. This content would be useful in identifying the defects and servicing of MEP
equipments. The knowledge and skill of various equipments of HVAC systems, electrical
systems and plumbing systems will be very useful in maintaining MEP systems in commercial
buildings
Course Objectives:
● To know the types of equipment’s in HVAC systems.
● To know the functions of HVAC systems, electrical systems and plumbing systems.
● Practice with servicing of HVAC equipment in the industry.
● Describe the procedure for maintaining of MEP equipment.
● Practicing and servicing of electrical and plumbing equipment.
Course Outcomes
On successful completion of this course the student will be able to,
CO 1 : Describe the working of HVAC equipment in the industry.
CO 2 : Explain the function of electrical equipments and their periodic maintenance.
CO 3 : Describe the functions of plumbing systems and their service procedure
CO 4 : Demonstrate the skills in identifying and rectifying the defects in MEP
equipments.
CO 5 : Explain the service procedure for MEP equipments in the industry.
Pre-requisites:
Thermodynamics, fundamentals of refrigeration and air-conditioning, functions of HVAC
components

REGULATION 2023
DME 325
1020236241 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 1 3
CO2 1 3
CO3 1 3
CO4 1 3
CO5 1 3
confidence.

REGULATION 2023
DME 326
1020236241 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
CA1 and CA2: All the exercises/experiments should be completed as per the portions
Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 327
1020236241 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
experiment.
file with documents. The Procedure, Sketch and Result / Output should be written by the
verification by the Flying Squad and DoTE Official.

C Adjustment / Dismantling / Assembling 20
TOTAL 50
60
Cycle - I - Exercise 1, 2, 3,4 and 5.

Cycle - II - Exercise 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10.
CA 3: Written Test for complete theory portions should be conducted for 100 Marks as

REGULATION 2023
DME 328
1020236241 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
CA 4: All the exercises/experiments should be completed and kept for the practical test.

D Troubles / Report 10
E Written test (MCQ) 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 329
1020236241 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus Contents
Theory Portion - Unit – I
Basic concept of thermodynamics – heat – temperature – pressure. 9

Introduction of central plant air conditioning – DX system – Chilled water system –
Air handling unit – fan coil unit – chilled water pump - water cooled chiller – air
cooled chiller – cooling tower – construction and working – Maintenance schedule
– servicing procedure
Practical Exercises
Exercise 1: Water heater 5
a. Drain your tank and remove sediment.
b. Check your anode rod regularly, as it's an important part of the water heater.
c. If you notice your water heater leaking, it may be caused by a loose drain
valve. Tighten with a wrench until snug.
d. Test the temperature release valve.
e. Insulate its pipes and the heater.
Exercise 2: Water pump
a. Dismantle and assemble a pump from the chilled water pipe line.
b. Dismantle and assemble of pump casing
c. Alignment of pump-motor shaft
Exercise 3: Cooling Tower 5
a. Check the fan motor assembly
b. Align the fan motor assembly
c. Check the float valve operation
d. Check the water nozzles and replace if blocked.
Exercise 4: Plumbing pump 5
a. Dismantling and assembly of pump casing
b. Check and replace shaft seal
c. Check and replace impeller

REGULATION 2023
DME 330
1020236241 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Exercise 5: Fire Fighting pumps 5

a. Check automatic start by opening a test line to reduce system pressure
b. Verify that relief valves operate properly
c. Check the fuel tank level for diesel pump
d. Check the oil and fuel filter in the diesel engine
e. Check the battery
Theory Portion - Unit – II

Electrical system – basics of electricity – electrical equipments – generator – 6
transformer – water heater – working and construction – servicing and
maintenance procedure
Plumbing system – basics of fluid flow – hot and cold water – drainage system –
water treatment plant – pumps – valves – strainer - servicing and maintenance
procedure.
Practical Exercises
Exercise 6: Cleaning AC Unit. 5
a. Filter cleaning
b. Cooling coil cleaning
c. Blower cleaning
d. Condenser coil cleaning
e. Condenser fan cleaning
Exercise 7: Checking AC unit 5
a. Checking refrigerant pressure
b. Check the drier .
c. Check the compressor.
d. Check the temperature control.
e. Check the supply air flow rate and temperature

REGULATION 2023
DME 331
1020236241 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Exercise 8: Transformer 5
a. Check the transformer oil level and top up if required
b. Clean the breather.
c. Check the bushing filled with oil to check oil level
d. Check the leakage of oil from any point
e. Check the oil pump
f. Check air fan
Exercise 9: Genset (Engine Generator) 5
a. Test Batteries
b. Check intake and exhaust
c. Inspect wiring / electrical system
Exercise 10: Genset (Engine Generator) 5
a. Check filters and replace if necessary
b. Check oil and replace as recommended
c. Check fuel filter and replace if blocked
d. Check and replace spark plugs
Total 75
1. ASHRAE Hand book Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning SYSTEMS AND
EQUIPMENT
2. The Institute of Plumbing – Plumbing Engineering Services Design Guide
3. Principles of Electrical Engineering and Electronics by V.K Mehta and Rohit Mehta
Web References
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PVGWHysJj78
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yEzCvjQ2sNY
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=q-Oooe0G7_c
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ct1WnU-q9Qs
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-5ccNAHF7I8

REGULATION 2023
DME 332
1020236241 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=f0tKsDjWgT8
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KTn2khCDqyw
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8jxRn-T_LCs
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cDnrpCX58bQ
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_FyePOpQkNo
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3Z7cEPQGX3E
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ouKCbxuW4r4
MEP Equipment List

1. Generator
2. Fire pumps
3. Sump pumps
4. Water treatment plant
5. Plumbing pumps, valves and strainer
6. Exhaust fans
7. Dx AC units
8. PAC units
9. Air cooled chiller
10. Water cooled chiller
11. Chilled water pumps
12. Cooling tower
13. Condenser water pumps
14. Air separator
Based on the requirement the quantity should be kept.

REGULATION 2023
DME 333
1020236241 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
END SEMESTER EXAMINATION - Practical Exam

Note:
D Troubles / Report 10
E Written test (Theory Portions) 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 334
1020236242 L T P C
Maintenance of Machine Tools
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
Diploma technocrats who are in the field of maintenance of machine tools should have a
thorough knowledge about the dismantling and assembly procedure, installation, maintenance
and repair of the machines and know about the technology used for the prediction of premature
failure of components in advance.
Course Objectives:
● To know the instruments used for maintenance
● To know the advanced maintenance techniques of machine tools to increase the
duration of life of the machines.
● To know the procedure for dismantling and assembly of equipment.
● To know the instruments used for machine tool testing.
● To know the different alignment techniques and accuracy of machine tools.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Setup instrument for machine tool maintenance.
CO2: Acquire knowledge of maintenance and troubleshooting of Machines and its
components
CO3: Acquire knowledge for dismantling and assembly of equipment’s
CO4: Setup instrument for machine tool testing
CO5. Acquire knowledge on machine tool alignment and the manufacturing accuracy of
machine tools.
Pre-requisites:
Basic workshop practice, Workshop practices, Machine Tool Technology

REGULATION 2023
DME 335
1020236242 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3
confidence.

REGULATION 2023
DME 336
1020236242 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 337
1020236242 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
experiment.
file with documents. The Procedure, Sketch and Report / Output should be written by the
A Dismantling / Procedure 20
B Troubleshooting procedure/ Geometrical test 20
C Assembling & Inspection Report / Test Chart 10
TOTAL 50
Total Marks 60

CA 3: Written Test for complete theory portions should be conducted for 100 Marks as per the
question pattern below. The marks scored will be converted to 15 Marks for internal
assessment.

REGULATION 2023
DME 338
1020236242 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
B Dismantling / Procedure 20
C Troubleshooting procedure/ Geometrical test 20
D Assembling & Inspection Report / Test Chart 10
E Written Test (Theory Portion) 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 339
1020236242 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus Contents
Theory Portion
MAINTENANCE ACTIVITY OF MACHINE TOOLS: 15

Maintenance: Objective-Definition –Types of maintenance-Advantages of good
maintenance-Disadvantages of bad maintenance-Instruments needed for
maintenance.
Maintenance of Lathe: Lathe maintenance-Drive belts- Adjusting belt tension, Gib
adjustment(cross slide, Compound slide),Wiper pads, Adjusting the Tailstock
clamp.
TESTING OF MACHINE TOOLS
Measuring Equipment and Tools used for testing of machine tools:
Dial gauges – test mandrels – straight edges - squares- spirit levels- level
measurement by water level- alignment by wire and measuring microscope.
DETAILS FOR TESTING VARIOUS MACHINE TOOLS:
Machine tool testing purpose-Types of geometrical checks on machine
tools-Various test conducted on machine tools-Alignment test on lathe, surface
grinding and milling machine.
Practical Exercises
Maintenance:
Exercise 1: Lathe maintenance-Drive belts- Adjusting belt tension, Gib adjustment 5
(cross slide,Compound slide), Wiper pads checking, Adjusting the Tailstock clamp.
Exercise 2: Slotter maintenance- Diving Pulley alignment checking-Belt tension 5
adjustment –Pinion gear inspection , table jib adjustment.
Exercise 3: Practice on oil removing & filling for a gear box. Inspection of the 5
drained oil for contaminants & wear debris with focus on visual inspection.
Preparation of coolants.
Exercise 4: Drawing and drafting of machine part as per requirement (in case of 5
worn out/ modification)

REGULATION 2023
DME 340
1020236242 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Exercise 5: Dismantle, inspect and assemble the Lead screw and Half nut of the 5
lathe.
Exercise 6: Dismantle, inspect and assemble the Three jaw chuck./Four jaw chuck 5
Exercise 7: Dismantle, inspect and assemble the Drill chuck. 5
Exercise 8: Surface roughness measurement on a machined component. 5
Machine Tool Alignment :
Exercise 9: Conduct the following test for the surface grinding machine with 5
horizontal grinding wheel spindle and prepare a test chart.
a. Check the level of work table in longitudinal and transverse direction.
b. Check the T-slots parallel with table movement.
c. Check the T-slots square with transverse movement of table.
d. Check the wheel spindle for true running and axial slip.
e. Check the wheel spindle parallel with surface of table.
Exercise 10: Conduct the following test for the horizontal milling machine and 5
prepare a test chart.
a. Check the flatness of the work table surface in longitudinal and transverse
direction
b. Check the true running of the internal taper of main spindle
c. Check the parallelism of the clamping surface of the work table in its longitudinal
motion.
d. Check the parallelism of the transverse movement of the work table to the main
spindle in vertical and horizontal plane.
e. Check the squareness of the table surface with column face.
Total 75

REGULATION 2023
DME 341
1020236242 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

1. Students can visit the industry and workshops nearby and observe how the maintenance
of machine tools were done.
2. Study the alignment test on machine tools such as Drilling and shaping.

1. Er.Sushil kumar Srivastava - Maintenance Engineering - Reprint2016 - S.Chand
publication.
2. Georg Schlesinger, F. Koenigsberger , M. Burdekin - TESTING MACHINE TOOLS - 8th
edition- Pergamon Press-1978.
3. K.J.Bag- Preventive Maintenance - ISTE Professional centre continuing education
Programme- Distributed by ISTE Professional centre AnnaUniversity campus, Chennai.
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=f58SW0Hwcf0 –Principle of Maintenance –NPTEL-
IIT Kharagpur

REGULATION 2023
DME 342
1020236242 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Note:
B Dismantling / Procedure 20
C Troubleshooting procedure/ Geometrical test 20
D Assembling & Inspection Report / Test Chart 10
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 343
1020236242 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
1. Lathe machine 1 No
2. Surface grinding machine 1 No
3. Milling machine 1 No
4. Slotting Machine 1 No
5. Surface roughness tester 1 No
6. Lead screw and nut 1 No
7. Three jaw chuck/ Four jaw chuck 1 No
8. Drill chuck 1 No
9. Dial gauge 5 Nos.
10. Magnetic stand 5 Nos.
11. Surface gauges 5 Nos.
12. Spirit level 5 Nos.
13. Spanners (DE/Ring/Box) Sufficient quantity
14. Screw drivers Sufficient quantity
15. Allen screw sets Sufficient quantity
16. Hammer Sufficient quantity
17. Test mandrels Sufficient quantity
18. Squares / Blocks Sufficient quantity

REGULATION 2023
DME 344
1020236243 L T P C
NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
Non-destructive testing (NDT)is a multidisciplinary profession that blends quality assurance and
materials science. NDT is used to inspect and evaluate materials, components, or assemblies
without destroying their serviceability. Through a set of test methods, skilled technicians identify
cracks, voids, inclusions, and weld discontinuities, as well as identify misassembled
subcomponents. This makes NDT crucial to help prevent catastrophic failures such as airplane
and locomotive crashes, pipeline leaks and explosions, nuclear reactor failures, and ship
disasters.
Course Objectives:
● To learn about the various Non Destructive testing methods.
● To identify the types of equipment used for each Non-Destructive and Destructive
Examination.
● To study about the process of Surface Testing Methods(LPT & MPT)
● To learn about the Sub Surface Testing methods(RT & UT)
● To study about the various applications of NDT Tests in Industries.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Explain NDT techniques which enable it to carry out various inspections in accordance
with the established procedures.
CO2: Calibrate the instrument and inspect for in-service damage in the components.
CO3: Differentiate various defect types and select the appropriate NDT methods for better
evaluation.
CO4: Communicate their conclusions clearly to specialist and non-specialist audiences.
CO5: Prepare the testing and evaluation of the results for further analysis.
Pre-requisites:
Knowledge of basic measuring instruments, material processing, and various types of materials
defects.

REGULATION 2023
DME 345
1020236243 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 - - 3 - - -
CO2 3 - - 3 - - -
CO3 3 - - 3 - - -
CO4 3 - - 3 - - -
CO5 3 - - 3 - - -
to learn.
projects.
possible.

REGULATION 2023
DME 346
1020236243 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:
CA1 and CA2: All the exercises/experiments should be completed as per the portions above
and kept for the practical test. The students shall be permitted to select any one by lot for the
test. The practical test should be conducted as per the scheme of evaluation as below. The
marks awarded shall be converted to 10 Marks for each assessment test. Best of one will be
considered for the internal assessment of 10 Marks.
Practical documents should be maintained for every experiment immediately after completion
of the practice. The practical document should be submitted for the practical test. The same
should be evaluated for 10 Marks for each exercise/experiment. The total marks awarded
should be converted to 10 Marks for the practical test as per the scheme of evaluation as below.

REGULATION 2023
DME 347
1020236243 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

experiment.
B Observation / Sketch 20
C Accuracy 15
TOTAL 50
60
Cycle - I - Exercise 1, 2, 3 and 4.

Cycle - II - Exercise 5, 6, 7 and 8..
assessment.

REGULATION 2023
DME 348
1020236243 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
CA 4: All the exercises/experiments should be completed and kept for the practical test. The
students shall be permitted to select any one by lot for the test. The practical test should be
conducted as per the scheme of evaluation below. After completion of all the exercises the
practical test should be conducted as per End Semester Examination question pattern scheme
of evaluation. The marks awarded should be converted to 15 Marks for the internal assessment.
A Procedure/Preparation 15
B Observation/Drawing 20
C Accuracy 15
D Result 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 349
1020236243 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus Contents
Theory Portion - Unit I
Introduction: Non destructive testing (NDT) and its comparison with destructive 8
testing, Defects/ flaws due to primary processing, secondary processing and
inservice, Types of defects determined by NDT, Common non-destructive testing
techniques, Advantages, limitations and applications of NDT.
Visual Inspection: Principle of visual Inspection, Defects which can be detected by
unaided visual Inspection, Optical aids used for visual inspection, Advantages and
limitations of visual inspection.
Liquid Penetrant Test: Advantages and limitations of Liquid Penetrant Test (LPT),
Physical principles of LPT, Procedure employed for LPT, Penetrant methods,
Materials used in LPT.
Magnetic Particle Test: Advantages and limitations of Magnetic Particle Test
(MPT), Procedure of MPT, Magnetizing Magnetic particles and suspending liquids,
Detectable discontinuities, Non-relevant indications, Applications.
Practical Exercises
Exercise 1: Detect the cracks in the specimen using Visual Inspection and ring test. 6
Exercise 2: Detect the Small surface flaws in the specimen using Microscopy 6
Examination test.
Exercise 3: Detect the Subsurface flaws in the specimen using Radiography. 6
Exercise 4: Detecting Surface flaws in specimen using Die-penetration test. 6
Theory Portion - Unit II
Eddy Current Test: Advantages and limitations of Eddy Current Test (ECT), 7
Operation variables, Eddy current instrumentation, Reference standards,
Applications.
Ultrasonic Test: Advantages and limitations of Ultrasonic Test (UT), General
characteristics of ultrasonic waves, Wave propagation and types of ultrasonic

REGULATION 2023
DME 350
1020236243 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
waves, Major variables in UT, Angle beam techniques, Immersion testing,

Applications.
Radiography Test: Uses/ Applicability of radiography, Advantages and
limitations of Radiography Test (RT), Interaction between penetrating radiation &
matter (Attenuation), Image conversion media, Film radiography, Real time
radiography.
Other Non-destructive Inspection Techniques: Acoustic emission inspection,
Microwave inspection, Thermal inspection, Electromagnetic techniques for residual
stress measurements, Optical holography, etc.
Practical Exercises
Exercise 5: Detect of Surface flaws in specimen using Ultrasonic test. 6
Exercise 6: Detect the cracks in specimen using Magnetic particle test. 6
Exercise 7: Detect the Surface and near surface flaws in specimen using Eddy 6
Current test.
Exercise 8: Case Study experiment - Can analyze entire structure of Any one used 6
machine components using Acoustic emission test.
Assessment Test + Revision 12
Total 75
TEXT BOOKS
1. “Non Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, Metals Handbook, Vol. 17, 9th Ed.,
ASM.1989
2. Srivastava, K.C., “Handbook of Magnetic Particle Testing”, Oscar publications. 1998
3. Hull, B., “Non Destructive Testing”, Springer. 2012
4. Dr.V.Jayakumar,Dr.K.Elangovan”Non-Destructive Testing of Materials”Lakshmi
Publications,Chennai,2017
5. Baldev Raj, Jayakumar T, Thavasimuthu M, Practical Non- Destructive Testing, 3rd Ed.,
Narosa. 2019

REGULATION 2023
DME 351
1020236243 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
● www.ndt-ed.org
● www.krautkramer.com.au
● https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc23_mm05

Note:
A Procedure/Preparation 15
B Observation/Drawing 20
C Accuracy 15
D Result 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 352
1020236244 L T P C
Process Automation
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
Process automation uses technology to automate complex business processes. It typically has
three functions: automating processes, centralizing information, and reducing the requirement
for input from people. It is designed to remove bottlenecks, reduce errors and loss of data, all
while increasing transparency, communication across departments, and speed of processing.
Process automation uses technology to automate complex business processes. It typically has
three functions: automating processes, centralizing information, and reducing the requirement
for input from people. It is designed to remove bottlenecks, reduce errors and loss of data, all
while increasing transparency, communication across departments, and speed of processing.
Course Objectives:
● Design and operate pneumatic circuits.
● Design and operate fluid power circuits.
● Use PLC system and its elements for process control.
● Familiarize the working of function blocks in PLC
● Use ON-Delay timer to control a motor
● Use OFF-Delay timer to control a motor
● Use counter function block (Up counter and Down counter)
● Control the automatic operation of pneumatic cylinder using PLC
Course Outcomes
CO1: Explain the working of hydraulic and pneumatics systems and its elements.
CO2: Familiarise the various symbols of hydraulic and pneumatics
systems
CO3: Construct the Hydraulic and Pneumatics circuits for different applications
CO4: Explain the working of logic gates and features of PLC
CO5: Apply the Logic gates and PLC for the automatic operations of hydraulics and
pneumatic machines.

REGULATION 2023
DME 353
1020236244 L T P C
Process Automation
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Pre-requisites:
Fluid Mechanics, Basic Electrical and Mechanical Engineering
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 - - 3
CO2 3 - - 3
CO3 3 - - 3
CO4 3 - - 3
CO5 3 - - 3
to learn.•Implement task-based learning activities where students work on specific tasks
or projects.
possible.

REGULATION 2023
DME 354
1020236244 L T P C
Process Automation
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15
60
Internal Marks 40
Tentative
Schedule
Note:

REGULATION 2023
DME 355
1020236244 L T P C
Process Automation
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

experiment.
B Circuit / Program 20
C Execution / Connection 15
TOTAL 50
60

assessment.

REGULATION 2023
DME 356
1020236244 L T P C
Process Automation
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
D Result 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100
Syllabus Contents

REGULATION 2023
DME 357
1020236244 L T P C
Process Automation
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Theory Portion
UNIT I: HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS 7

Pneumatic systems: Elements-FLR unit-Direction Control Valves-Flow control Valves-ISO
Symbols of Pneumatic Components-pneumatic circuits for various industrial applications.
Hydraulic Systems: Elements – comparison of Pneumatic systems and Hydraulic
systems-service properties of hydraulic fluids-ISO symbols of hydraulic
Components-hydraulic circuits for various industrial applications.
Practical Exercises
Pneumatics Lab 15
Exercise 1: Operation of double acting cylinder with quick exhaust valve.
Exercise 2: Speed control of a double acting cylinder using metering-in and metering-out
circuits.
Exercise 3: Automatic operation of double acting cylinder in single cycle - using limit
switch.
Hydraulics Lab 10
Exercise 4: Direct operation of the double acting cylinder.
Exercise 5: Speed control of double acting cylinder metering-in and metering-out control.
Theory Portion
UNIT II: LOGIC GATES AND PLC 8
PLC
Features of PLC - PLC Block diagram - PLC scan. Fixed and Modular PLC. Ladder logic -
Basic principles of Ladder diagram , Analog I / O and Digital I /O, NO, NC contacts - Coils -
AND logic, OR logic.- Applications - Timer - Counter.
Practical Exercises
PLC Lab 25
Exercise 6: Direct operation of a motor using a latching circuit, AND, OR, logic circuits.
Exercise 7: On-Delay control of a motor and Off –Delay control of a motor.

REGULATION 2023
DME 358
1020236244 L T P C
Process Automation
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Exercise 8: Automatic operation of Double acting cylinder-Multi cycle.

Exercise 9: Sequential operation of a double acting cylinder and a motor.
Exercise 10: Automatic operation of DAC, Forward time delay return.
Total 75

Note:
D Result 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 359
1020236244 L T P C
Process Automation
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Note: The components should be supplied separately. Students should fix the board to execute
the circuit.
1. Pneumatic Trainer Board – 2 Nos
(All Cylinders, Control Valves, Limit switches and other accessories should be kept
separately and should not be fixed permanently in the board/ stand.)
2. Hydraulics Trainer Board – 2 No.
(All Cylinders, Control Valves, Limit switches and other accessories should be kept
separately and should not be fixed permanently in the board / stand.)
3. PLC – 3 Nos.
4. Computer with software – 10 Nos.

REGULATION 2023
DME 360
1020236245 L T P C
PRODUCT DESIGN & DEVELOPMENT
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
A product is something sold by an enterprise to its customers. Product design deals with
conversion of ideas into reality and, as in other forms of human activity, aims at fulfilling human
needs. Product development is the set of activities beginning with the perception of a market
opportunity and ending in the production, sale, and delivery of a product.
Course Objectives:
The objective of the course is
1. To excel in new product design and development through application of knowledge and
practical skills.
2. To provide students with a solid foundation in mathematical modeling of engineering
problems required for bringing new products fast into the market.
3. To provide students with required scientific and engineering knowledge so as to comprehend,
analyze, design and create innovative products and solutions for real life problems.
4. To inculcate professional and ethical values in students and enable them to work in
multidisciplinary teams.
5. To provide students an academic environment which can facilitate life-long learning needed
for a successful career in new product development.
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of this course, student will be able to
CO1: Describe the characteristics used for product design and development.
CO2: Assess the customer requirements in product design.
CO3: Apply structural approach to concept generation, selection and testing.
CO4: Identify various aspects of design such as industrial design, design for
manufacture, assembly, service and quality and product architecture.
CO5: Explain various principles and technologies used for the preparation of prototype.

2023 REGULATION
361
1020236245 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Pre-requisites:
Knowledge of basic Science: Design of machine elements, CAD/CAM and Product Life Cycle
Management.
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO4 2 2 1 1 2 1 1
CO5 2 2 1 2 1 1 1
1. Real time product design should be shown through video.
2. The subject can Lecture Cum Demonstration basics.
3. Practical demonstrations should be organized (industrial Visit).

2023 REGULATION
362
1020236245 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15
60
Internal Marks 40
Tentative
Schedule
Note:

2023 REGULATION
363
1020236245 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Each exercise should be completed on the day of practice. The same shall be evaluated for 10
marks on the day or next day of practice before commencement of the next experiment.
This documentation can be carried out in a separate notebook or a printed manual or a file with
documents. The Procedure, Sketch and Result / Output should be written by the student
logbook. The log book and the practical documents should be submitted for the verification by
the Flying Squad and DoTE Official.
B Step / Report 20
C Presentation 20
TOTAL 50
60
assessment.
Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks

2023 REGULATION
364
1020236245 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

B Step / Report 20
C Presentation 20
D Result / output 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100
Syllabus Contents
Unit I INTRODUCTION
Theory: Product life cycle, Product policy of an organization, Selection of a 3
profitable product, Product design process, New product strategy Idea generation,
Screening Concept development, Testing Business analysis Product development
testing and Analysis Commercialization Collaboration. Gantt chart product life cycle
management.
Practical: 10
1. Case studies related to Characteristics of successful product development,
Design and development of products.
2. Case studies related to different Development Processes and Organizations.

2023 REGULATION
365
1020236245 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Unit II PRODUCT PLANNING

Theory: The product planning process, identify opportunities. Evaluate and 3
prioritize projects, allocate resources and plan timing, complete pre project
planning, reflect all the results and the process.
Practical: 10
3. Case studies related to the product planning process, identify opportunities.
4. Case studies related to Concept Generation, Concept Selection, Concept
Testing.
Unit III IDENTIFYING CUSTOMER NEEDS
Theory: Gather raw data from customers, interpret raw data in terms of customer 3
needs, organize the needs into a hierarchy, establish the relative importance of the
needs and reflect on the results and the process. Product Specifications: What are
specifications, when are specifications established, establishing target
specifications, setting the final specifications.
Practical: 10
5. Case studies related to Identifying Customer Needs.
6. Case studies related to Customer Product Specification.
Unit IV CONCEPT GENERATION
Theory: Product implications of the architecture, establishing the architecture, 3
variety and supply chain considerations. Industrial design: Assessing the need for
industrial design, the impact of industrial design, industrial design process,
managing the industrial design process, assessing the quality of industrial design.
Design for manufacturing: Definition, estimation of manufacturing cost, reducing
the cost of components, assembly, supporting production, impact of DFM on other
factors, service and quality.
Practical: 10
7. Case studies related to Product Architecture.

2023 REGULATION
366
1020236245 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
8. Case studies related to Design for Manufacturing.

Unit V PROTOTYPING
Theory: Prototyping basics, principles of prototyping, technologies, planning for 3
prototypes. Product development economics, Elements of economic analysis, base
case financial mode, sensitive analysis, project trade-offs, influence of qualitative
factors on project success, qualitative analysis.
Practical: 10
9. Case studies related to Prototyping, Product Development Economics.
10. Field Visit Report manufacturing or assembling industry.(Automobile
Industry – Minimum – 4 Hrs) – Report should include: various steps
involved in product manufacturing or product assemble ...(not included in
Practical Exam)
Assessment + Revision 10
TOTAL 75

Other than the classroom learning, the following are the suggested student related co- curricular
course.
1. Online video demonstration.
2. Practical demonstration.
3. Automobile industry visit and prepare a report.
Involve students in trouble shooting activities either in group or individual.

1. Karl T Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger , “ Product Design & Development.” Tata McGrawhill New
Delhi 2003
2. Hollins B & Pugh S “Successful Product Design.” Butter worths London.
3. Bralla J G “Handbook of Product Design for Manufacture, McGrawhill NewYork.

2023 REGULATION
367
1020236245 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
4. A K Chitale and R C Gupta, Product Design and Manufacturing, 6th Edition, PHI, New Delhi,
2003.
5. Boothroyd G, Dewhurst P and Knight W, Product Design for Manufacture and Assembly, 2nd
Edition, Marcel Dekker, New York, 2002.
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107217/
End Semester Examination - Practical Exam

Note:

B Step / Report 20
C Presentation 20
D Result / output 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

2023 REGULATION
368
1020236246 L T P C
Electric Vehicle Technology
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
The world is transitioning to cleaner mobility options with the aim at improving air quality and
reducing dependency on fossil fuels. Electric Vehicles (EVs) have emerged as a popular clean
mobility choice to reduce emissions. EVs are powered fully or partially by batteries, they can
help to reduce dependence on fossil fuels and also air quality.
Course Objectives:
The objective of this course is to enable the students to
● Learn and practice the charging systems of Electric Vehicles.
● Understand the concept of Electric Vehicle components.
● Study the configurations of Electric Vehicles and assemble.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Describe the electric vehicle and sub systems.
CO2: Demonstrate and test the EV battery and charging system.
CO3: Apply the procedures and testing of electric components and their accessories.
CO4: Test, diagnose and service the given electric two-wheeler.
CO5: Construct and test the electric Three-wheeler.
Pre-requisites:
Nil

REGULATION 2023
DME 369
1020236246 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 1 - - - 1 - -
CO2 2 1 - 2 - - 1
CO3 1 1 1 2 - - 1
CO4 1 1 1 2 - - 1
CO5 1 1 1 1 - - 1
confidence.
experiment outcomes and analyze potential sources of error in case of discrepancies.
● The industry session shall be addressed by industry experts (in contact mode/online /
recorded video mode) in the discipline only.

REGULATION 2023
DME 370
1020236246 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15
60
Internal Marks 40
Tentative
Schedule
Note:

REGULATION 2023
DME 371
1020236246 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

A Procedure / Explanation 10
B Observation/ Assembly/ Reading 20
C Test Report 20
TOTAL 50
60

assessment.

REGULATION 2023
DME 372
1020236246 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
B Procedure / Explanation 10
C Observation/ Assembly/ Reading 20
D Test Report 20
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 373
1020236246 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus Contents
Theory Portion - Electric Vehicle and accessories
Environmental impact of conventional vehicle - Air pollution –History of Electric 15

vehicles – Need for Electric Vehicle. Battery Electric Vehicle (BEV) –Block diagram
of BEV - Major Components of Electric Vehicle – Working of BEV.
Battery: Construction and working of Lead Acid and Lithium Based Batteries
–Battery Management System.
Battery Charging Techniques: Battery Charging techniques – Constant current and
Constant voltage, Trickle charging – Battery Swapping Techniques.
Types of EV motors - Permanent Magnetic BrushLess DC Motor Drives (BLDC) –
Principles, Construction and Working – Hub motor Drive system – Merits and
Demerits of DC motor drive, BLDC motor drive.
Power Converters: Role of Power Converters – Block diagram of Power Converters
in EV – Types of Power Converters – DC to DC Converter, Inverter and Rectifier.
Electronics Power Steering – Torque Sensor – EPS Motor – Regenerative
Suspension System –Regenerative Braking system.
Tamil Nadu EV Policy 2019 & 2023.
Practical Exercises
Experiment 1: Battery Testing – Specific Gravity Test, Open volt testing, Cell voltage 5
tester.
Experiment 2: Test the Lead acid Battery using voltage Load tester and test the 5
battery pack supply to glow the Head lamp.
Experiment 3: Test the battery charging (Series and Parallel) and note the various 5
charging parameters.
Experiment 4: Identify and test EV components. (Controller, Throttle, EV motor, 5
Power ON Key, brake, indicator, horn and headlight)
Experiment 5: Construct and testing of BLDC Motor with throttle control. 5
Experiment 6: Test the Inverter circuit and buck converter circuit. 5

REGULATION 2023
DME 374
1020236246 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Experiment 7: Assemble and test E-bicycle with wiring harness. 5

Experiment 8: Assemble and test E-Bike with a central drive mechanism (Chain 5
drive) with wiring harness.
Experiment 9: Assemble and test E-Auto rickshaw with differential and wiring 5
harness.
Experiment 10: Plan maintenance and servicing schedule of electric two-wheeler. 5
Total 75

● Presentation/Seminars by students on any recent technological developments based on
the course.

1. A.K Babu, Electric & Hybrid Vehicle, Khanna Publication, New Delhi – 2018 Edition
2. Iqbal Husian, Electric and Hybrid Vehicle Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, Boca Raton,
Florida
3. Comparison of Electric and Conventional Vehicles in Indian Market: Total Cost of
Ownership, Consumer Preference and Best Segment for Electric Vehicle (IJSR), Akshat
Bansal, Akriti Agarwal
4. Tamil Nadu Electric Vehicles Policy 2019 & 2023 .
5. Design and analysis of aluminum/air battery system for electric vehicles, Shaohua Yang,
Harold Knickle, Elsevier.
6. Propelling Electric Vehicles in India, Technical study of Electric Vehicles and Charging
Infrastructure

REGULATION 2023
DME 375
1020236246 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
1. NPTEL Fundamentals of Electric vehicles: Technology & Economics

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106170
2. NPTEL Introduction to Hybrid and Electric Vehicles, IIT Guwahati
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108103009

Note:
C Observation/ Assembly/ Reading 20
D Report 20
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 376
1020236246 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Sl. No. Machines / Tools / Equipments Quantity

8 Nos.
1. Lead acid battery / Lithium-ion battery
1 No.
2. Battery Load tester
2 Nos.
3. Specific gravity tester- Hydrometer
1 No.
4. Cell voltage tester (High Discharge Tester)
2 Nos.
5. Buck Converter
1 No.
6. Battery Charger
1 No
7. Inverter Trainer Kit
1 No
8. BLDC motor control Trainer kit or accessories
1 No
9. Two-wheeler Wiring Harness board or kit
1 No
10. E – Bicycle kit or Accessories
1. 24V DC Controller, 24 V DC motor
2. Throttle, Brake, Power ON key
3. Head lamp with Horn
1 No
11. E – Bike kit or Accessories
1. 48 V BLDC Controller, 500W or 750 W, 48 V
BLDC motor, Throttle, Brake, Power ON key,
Display Board, Head lamp with Horn, Left &
Right Indicator
12. E-Auto Rickshaw 1 No
500 W or 750 W, 48 V BLDC motor with differential
arrangement
1. Throttle
2. Brake
3. Power ON key
4. Display Board
5. Head lamp with Horn
6. Left & Right Indicator

REGULATION 2023
DME 377
1020236246 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
As per requirement
13. Consumable: -
● Battery Cell - 1.5 V or 3.65 V
● Soldering Iron
● Flux
● De-solder gun or Solder wick
● Lead
Tools
● Continuity Tester
● Line Tester
● Multi-meter
● Screw Drive set & Spanner set

REGULATION 2023
DME 378
1020236247 L T P C
REVERSE ENGINEERING
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
Reverse Engineering (RE) has become an important Engineering task to obtain knowledge about
engineering devices or systems. RE is an effective learning technique if other “solutions” are
available on the market.
Course Objectives:
After the completion of the course, students should be able to:
● Understand basic engineering systems.
● Understand the terminologies related to re-engineering, forward engineering, and reverse
engineering.
● Disassemble products and specify the interactions between its subsystems and their
functionality
● Understand Reverse Engineering methodologies.
● Understand Reverse engineering of Systems, Mechanical RE.
Course Outcomes
CO1: Explain the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design
and development.
CO2: Describe the principles of material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering
CO3: Apply the principles of material identification and process verification in product design
and development.
CO4: Explain the principles of rapid prototyping
CO5: Analyze the various legal aspect and applications of reverse engineering in product design
and development

REGULATION 2023
DME 379
1020236247 L T P C
REVERSE ENGINEERING
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Pre-requisites:
Material Science, Machine Design, Machine Drawing and Value Engineering.
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 2 1
CO2 3 2 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 1
CO5 3 2 1
confidence.

REGULATION 2023
DME 380
1020236247 L T P C
REVERSE ENGINEERING
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15 60
Tentative
Schedule
Note:

REGULATION 2023
DME 381
1020236247 L T P C
REVERSE ENGINEERING
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

C Presentation 20
TOTAL 50
60
Cycle - II - Exercise 6, 7, 8 and 9.
assessment.

REGULATION 2023
DME 382
1020236247 L T P C
REVERSE ENGINEERING
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks
C Presentation 20
D Result 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 383
1020236247 L T P C
REVERSE ENGINEERING
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Syllabus Contents
Unit I Introduction
Theory: Definition – Uses – the Generic Process – Phases – Computer Aided Reverse 3
Engineering - Surface and Solid Model Reconstruction – Dimensional Measurement –
Prototyping.
Practical: 6
1. Prepare case study report – various type of rapid Proto type also write the
technical difference.
UNIT II MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION AND PROCESS VERIFICATION
Theory: Material Specification, Composition Determination, Microstructure Analysis, 3

Manufacturing Process Verification.
Practical: 12
2. Material Strength Testing: Compare the strength properties of different
materials commonly used in automobile components, such as steel, aluminum,
and composite materials. Perform tensile, compressive, and bending tests to
determine their suitability for various vehicle types.
3. Impact Resistance Analysis: Test the impact resistance of different Automobile
body materials by subjecting them to controlled impacts. Measure and
compare the deformation and damage caused by impacts of varying intensity.
Unit III MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS, PART DURABILITY AND
LIFE LIMITATION
Theory: 3
Alloy Structure Equivalency – Phase Formation and Identification – Mechanical
Strength – Hardness –Part Failure Analysis – Fatigue – Creep and Stress Rupture –
Environmentally Induced Failure

REGULATION 2023
DME 384
1020236247 L T P C
REVERSE ENGINEERING
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Practical: 5
4. Structural Rigidity Testing: Conduct bending and torsion tests on Automobile body
frames to determine their structural rigidity. Compare different frame designs and
materials to identify the most robust and lightweight options.
Unit IV RAPID PROTOTYPING(RP)
Theory:, Introduction, current RP techniques and materials, Stereo Lithography, 3
Selective Laser Sintering, Fused Deposition Modeling, Three-dimensional Printing,
Laminated Object Manufacturing, Multijet Modeling.
Practical: 12
5. Crash Testing Simulation: Utilize crash test dummies and acceleration sensors
to simulate vehicle collisions. Study how different body designs and materials
affect passenger safety and structural integrity during impact.
6. Prepare case study report - Rapid Prototyping – Any one mechanical Machine
components (Impeller, Engine Block, Piston and Door Pad)
Unit V INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS
Theory: Reverse Engineering in the Automotive Industry; Aerospace Industry. Case 3
studies and Solving Industrial projects in Reverse Engineering.
Legality: Patent – Copyrights –Trade Secret – Third-Party Materials.
Practical: 15
7. Prepare case study report – Patent
8. Prepare case study report – Copy rights
9. Prepare case study report – Trade Mark
Assessment + Revision 10
TOTAL 75

1. Reverse Engineering: An Industrial Perspective by V. Raja and K. Fernandes, Springer-
Verlag.Wego

REGULATION 2023
DME 385
1020236247 L T P C
REVERSE ENGINEERING
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
2. Kevin Otto , “Product Design : Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New Product
Development”, ISBN-13: 9788177588217, Dorling Kindersley
3. Robert Messler, “Reverse Engineering: Mechanisms, Structures, Systems & Materials”,
McGraw Hill Education, ISBN: 9780071825160
4. Reverse Engineering by K. A. Ingle, McGraw-Hill.
5. Raja, Vinesh, Fernandes, Kiran J. , “Reverse Engineering An Industrial Perspective” ISBN
978-1-84628-856-2, Springer

Note:
C Presentation 20
D Result 10
E Written Test 30
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 386
1020236248 L T P C
Green Energy & Engineering
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Introduction:
Traditional energy sources such as coal, oil, and natural gas contribute significantly to
greenhouse gas emissions, air pollution, and environmental degradation. By transitioning to
green energy sources such as solar, wind, hydroelectric, and biomass, engineers can mitigate
these harmful effects while meeting the growing global demand for energy. The green energy
projects often have lower life cycle carbon footprints compared to conventional energy sources,
making them essential for achieving climate targets and promoting sustainable development. In
essence, incorporating green energy into engineering practices is not only necessary for
addressing environmental concerns but also essential for creating a resilient, equitable, and
prosperous future for all.
Course Objectives:
● To impart knowledge on solar energy collection and to demonstrate practical
applications and benefits of solar panels and energy storage systems.
● To understand the principles of wind energy and biomass energy.
● To impart knowledge about geothermal heat pumps, ocean thermal energy conversion
(OTEC), and their feasibility.
● To provide fundamental principles of energy-efficient appliances, building designs, and
smart systems.
● To acquire knowledge regarding sustainable manufacturing process and to explore on
eco-friendly production processes, materials, and waste reduction strategies.
Course Outcomes
On successful completion of this course, the students will be able to,
CO1 - Acquire the knowledge of the principles of solar energy conversion and their benefits.
CO2 - Enable for building a small range of wind energy conversion system.
CO3 - Gain knowledge on the various classification of energy sources and their environmental
issues.

REGULATION 2023
DME 387
1020236248 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
CO4 - Analyze the limitless availability of green energy sources and understand the challenges
in renewable hybrid system.
CO5 - learn hydrogen production method, storage methods and waste reduction strategies.
Pre-requisites:
Knowledge of basic energy sources.
CO/PO Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 - 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 - 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1
CO4 3 1 - 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 1 - 1 1 1 2
to learn.
projects.
multimedia and virtual communication tools, to enhance engagement and provide

REGULATION 2023
DME 388
1020236248 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

possible.
Semester
(60 marks)
Mode
Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to
10 10 15 15 60
Marks
Marks 10 15 15
60
Internal Marks 40
Tentative
Schedule
Note:

REGULATION 2023
DME 389
1020236248 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
B Block diagram / Explanation 20
TOTAL 50
60

REGULATION 2023
DME 390
1020236248 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

assessment.
Description Marks

Questions.
TOTAL 100 Marks

REGULATION 2023
DME 391
1020236248 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
B Block diagram / Explanation 20
D Result / Output 10
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100
Syllabus Contents
UNIT I SOLAR ENERGY & WIND ENERGY
INTRODUCTION 7
Overview of conventional & renewable energy sources, types of renewable energy
systems, Future of Energy Use, Present Indian and international energy scenario of
conventional and RE sources, Energy for sustainable development, Environmental
Aspects of Energy, Limitations of RE sources.
SOLAR ENERGY & WIND ENERGY
Theory of solar cells - Concept of Solar PV systems - Flat plate and concentrating
collectors, Solar PV Applications - solar heating/cooling technique, solar distillation
and solar drying, solar cookers. Energy from Wind - Horizontal axis Wind Turbine -

REGULATION 2023
DME 392
1020236248 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Vertical Axis Wind Turbine - Wind Energy Conversion Systems

Familiarization with Different Solar Energy Gadgets
Exercise 1: Study of Solar Distillation System 5
Exercise 2: Performance test on Solar Cooker 5
Exercise 3: Performance analysis of Solar Water Heater 5
Exercise 4: Performance test on Solar Dryer 5
Exercise 5: Performance Evaluation on Solar Lighting System 5
UNIT II GEOTHERMAL ENERGY, BIOMASS, HYDROGEN

STORAGE, ENERGY EFFICIENT SYSTEMS & GREEN MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS
OCEAN ENERGY, BIO-MASS ENERGY & HYDROGEN PRODUCTION 8
OTEC, Principles of utilization, setting of OTEC plants - Tidal and wave energy.
Principles of bio-conversion - types of bio-gas digesters, gas yield, utilization for
cooking, bio fuels, I.C. engine operation and economic aspects. Chemical Production
of Hydrogen- Electrolytic Hydrogen- Thermolytic Hydrogen- Photolytic Hydrogen-
Photobiologic Hydrogen Production
ENERGY EFFICIENT & GREEN MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS

Energy efficient motors, energy efficient lighting and control. Fuel cells- principle,
thermodynamic aspects, selection of fuels & working of various types of fuel cells,
Environmental friendly and Energy efficient compressors and pumps. Environmental
impact of the current manufacturing practices and systems, benefits of green
manufacturing systems, selection of recyclable and environment friendly materials in
manufacturing, Sustainable green production systems - alternate casting and joining
techniques, zero waste manufacturing.
Exercise 6: Study on the Production Process of Bio-Fuels 5
Exercise 7: Study on the Floating Drum & Fixed Drum Biogas Plants 5

REGULATION 2023
DME 393
1020236248 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
Exercise 8: Study on the various Bio-mass energy conservation technologies. 5

Exercise 9: Study on Production Process of Briquettes 5
Exercise 10: Performance test on BIO Diesel using blend analyzer 5
Revision + Assessment Test 10

1. D. S. Chauhan & S. K. Srivastava, Non-Conventional Energy Resources, New Age
International Private Limited, 4 th Edition, 2021.
2. John Twidell & Tony Weir, Renewable Energy Resources, Routledge; 3 rd Edition,
2015.
3. D.P. Kothari, K.C. Singal & Rakesh Ranjan, Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging
Technologies, PHI Learning; 3 rd Edition, 2022.
4. Ritu Dogra, Renewable Energy and Green Technology, Brillion Publishing, 1 st Edition,
2023.
5. Soli J. Arceivala, Green Technologies, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 1 st
Edition, 2017.
6. Chandan Deep Singh & Harleen Kaur, Sustainable Green Development and
Manufacturing Performance through Modern Production Techniques, Taylor &
Francis Ltd, 1 st Edition, 2021.
Web and Online Resources

● https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ch11/preview

REGULATION 2023
DME 394
1020236248 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3

Note:
C Presentation 20
D Result 10
F Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 395
1020236248 L T P C
PRACTICUM 1 0 4 3
List of Equipment required.
Quantity
S.No Name of the Equipment
required
1 Solar PV Panel 1
2 Solar Current lamp 2
3 PV analyser 1
4 Solar Irradiation Meter 1
5 Solar Cooker 1
6 RTD - 2 mts 10 Qty
7 Solar Dryer 1
8 Pyranometer 2
9 Axial Fan 1
10 Biodiesel 2 lt
11 Biodiesel blend analyse 1
12 Solar Water Heater 1
Sufficient
Consumables and instruments
quantity

REGULATION 2023
DME 396
1020236351 C
Internship 540 Periods
PROJECT 12
Introduction
Internships in educational institutions are designed to provide students with practical
experience in their field of study and to bridge the gap between academic knowledge
and professional practice.
Objectives
After completing Internship, Interns will be able to,
● Apply the theoretical knowledge and skill during performance of the tasks
assigned in internship.
● Demonstrate soft skills such as time management, positive attitude and
communication skills during performance of the tasks assigned in internship.
● Document the Use case on the assigned Task.
● Enable interns to apply theoretical knowledge gained in the classroom to
real-world practical applications.
● Provide hands-on experience in the industrial practices.
● Develop essential skills such as communication, organization, teamwork, and
problem-solving.
● Enhance specific skills related to the intern’s area of focus.
● Offer a realistic understanding of the daily operations and responsibilities.
● Provide opportunities to work under the guidance of experienced supervisors and
administrators.
● Allow interns to explore different career paths.
● Help interns make informed decisions about their future career goals based on
first hand experience.
● Facilitate the establishment of professional relationships with supervisor,
administrators, and other professionals in the field.

REGULATION 2023
DME 397
1020236351 C
PROJECT 12
● Provide access to a network of contacts that can be beneficial for future job
opportunities and professional growth.
● Foster personal growth by challenging interns to step out of their comfort zones
and take on new responsibilities.
● Build confidence and self-efficacy through successful completion of internship
tasks and projects.
● Give insight into the policies, regulations, and administrative practices.
● Allow interns to observe and understand the implementation of standards and
policies in practice.
● Provide opportunities for constructive feedback from supervisors and mentors,
aiding in the intern’s professional development.
● Enable self-assessment and reflection on strengths, areas for improvement, and
career aspirations.
● Encourage sensitivity to the needs and backgrounds of different groups,
promoting inclusive and equitable industrial practices.
Course Outcomes
CO 1: Demonstrate improved skills.
CO 2: Exhibit increased professional behavior.
CO 3: Apply theoretical knowledge and principles in real-world practices.
CO 4: Develop and utilize assessment tools to evaluate the learning and practices.
CO 5: Engage in reflective practice to continually improve their learning and professional
growth.
Facilitating the Interns by an Internship Provider.

Orient intern in the new workplace. Give interns an overview of the organization, Explain
the intern’s duties and introduce him or her to co-workers.

REGULATION 2023
DME 398
1020236351 C
PROJECT 12
Develop an internship job description with clear deliverables and timeline.

Allow the interns in meetings and provide information, resources, and opportunities for
professional development.
The interns have never done this kind of work before, they want to know that their work
is measuring up to organizational expectations, hence provide professional guidance
and mentoring to the intern.
Daily progress report of Intern is to be evaluated by industry supervisor. examine what
the intern has produced and make suggestions. Weekly supervision meetings can help
to monitor the intern’s work.
Duties Responsibilities of the Faculty Mentor
To facilitate the placement of students for the internship
To liaison between the college and the internship provider
To assist the Industrial Training Supervisor during assessment
Instructions to the Interns
● Students shall report to the internship provider on the 1st day as per the
internship schedule.
● Intern is expected to learn about the organization, its structure, product range,
market performance, working philosophy etc.
● The interns shall work on live projects assigned by the internship provider.
● The Intern shall record all the activities in the daily log book and get the signature
of the concerned training supervisor.
● Intern shall have 100% attendance during internship programme. In case of
unavoidable circumstances students may avail leave with prior permission from
the concerned training supervisor of the respective internship provider. However,
the maximum leave permitted during internship shall be as per company norms
where they are working and intern shall report the leave sanctioned details to
their college faculty mentor.

REGULATION 2023
DME 399
1020236351 C
PROJECT 12
● The interns shall abide all the Rules and Regulations of internship provider
● Intern shall follow all the safety Regulations of internship provider.
● On completion of the internship, the intern shall report to the college and
submit the internship certificate mentioning duration of internship, evaluation of
interns by internship provider, Student’s Diary and Comprehensive Training
Report.
Every month students have to get their attendance certified by the industrial supervisor
in the prescribed form supplied to them. Students have also to put their signature on the
form and submit it to the institution supervisor. Regularity in attendance and
submission of report will be duly considered while awarding the Internal Assessment
mark.
Training Reports
The students have to prepare two types of reports: Weekly reports in the form of a diary
to be submitted to the concerned staff in-charge of the institution. This will be reviewed
while awarding Internal
Students are required to maintain the record of day-to-day work done. Such a record is
called Industrial training Diary. Students have to write this report regularly. All days for
the week should be accounted for clearly giving attendance particulars (Presence,
absence, Leave, Holidays etc.). The concern of the Industrial supervisor is to periodically
check these progress reports.
Comprehensive Training Report
In addition to the diary, students are required to submit a comprehensive report on
training with details of the organisation where the training was undergone after
attestation by the supervisors. The comprehensive report should incorporate study of
plant/product/process/construction along with intensive in-depth study on any one of

REGULATION 2023
DME 400
1020236351 C
PROJECT 12
the topics such as processes, methods, tooling, construction and equipment,

highlighting aspects of quality, productivity and system. The comprehensive report
should be completed in the last week of Industrial training.
Any data, drawings etc. should be incorporated with the consent of the Organisation.
Internal Assessment
Students should be assessed for 50 Marks by industry supervisor and polytechnic
faculty mentor during 8th Week and 15th Week. The total marks (50 + 50) scored shall
be converted to 40 marks for the Internal Assessment.
B Level / proficiency of practical skills 10

acquired. Initiative in learning / working at
site
C Ability to solve practical problems. Sense of 10

responsibility
D Self expression / communication skills. 10

E Report and Presentation. 10
Total 50

REGULATION 2023
DME 401
1020236351 C
PROJECT 12
examiner appointed by the Chairman Board of Examinations after the completion of
internship period (Dec - May). The marks scored will be converted to 60 marks for the
End Semester Examination.
A Daily Activity Report. 20

department.

Internship.
D Viva Voce 20
Total 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 402
1020236353 C
Fellowship 540 Periods
PROJECT 12
Introduction
The Fellowship in the Diploma in Engineering program is designed to provide aspiring engineers
with a comprehensive educational experience that combines theoretical knowledge with
practical skills. This fellowship aims to cultivate a new generation of proficient and innovative
engineers who are equipped to meet the challenges of a rapidly evolving technological
landscape.
Participants in this fellowship will benefit from a robust curriculum that covers core engineering
principles, advanced technical training, and hands-on projects. The program emphasizes
interdisciplinary learning, encouraging fellows to explore various branches of engineering, from
mechanical and civil to electrical, electronics & communication and computer engineering. This
approach ensures that graduates possess a versatile skill set, ready to adapt to diverse career
opportunities in the engineering sector.
In addition to academics, the fellowship offers numerous opportunities for professional
development. Fellows will engage with industry experts through seminars, workshops, and
internships, gaining valuable insights into real-world applications of their studies. Collaborative
projects and research initiatives foster a culture of innovation, critical thinking, and
problem-solving, essential attributes for any successful engineer.
By offering this fellowship, participants become part of a vibrant community of learners and
professionals dedicated to advancing the field of engineering. The program is committed to
supporting the growth and development of each fellow, providing them with the tools and
resources needed to excel both academically and professionally.
The Fellowship in the Diploma in Engineering is more than just an educational endeavor; it is a
transformative journey that equips aspiring engineers with the knowledge, skills, and
experiences necessary to make significant contributions to society and the engineering
profession.

REGULATION 2023
DME 403
1020236353 C
PROJECT 12
Objectives
After completing students will be able to,
● Provide fellows with a solid foundation in core engineering principles and advanced
technical knowledge across various engineering disciplines.
● Equip fellows with hands-on experience through laboratory work, projects, and
internships, ensuring they can apply theoretical knowledge to real-world scenarios.
● Promote interdisciplinary understanding by encouraging exploration and integration of
different engineering fields, fostering versatility and adaptability in fellows.
● Encourage innovation and creativity through research projects and collaborative
initiatives, enabling fellows to develop new solutions to engineering challenges.
● Facilitate professional growth through workshops, seminars, and interactions with
industry experts, preparing fellows for successful careers in engineering.
● Develop critical thinking and problem-solving skills, essential for tackling complex
engineering problems and making informed decisions.
● Strengthen connections between academia and industry by providing opportunities for
internships, industry visits, and guest lectures from professionals.
● Foster leadership qualities and teamwork skills through group projects and collaborative
activities, preparing fellows for leadership roles in their future careers.
● Instill a sense of ethical responsibility and awareness of the social impact of engineering
practices, encouraging fellows to contribute positively to society.
● Promote a culture of lifelong learning, encouraging fellows to continually update their
knowledge and skills in response to technological advancements and industry trends.
● Prepare fellows to work in a global engineering environment by exposing them to
international best practices, standards, and cross-cultural experiences.

REGULATION 2023
DME 404
1020236353 C
PROJECT 12
Course Outcomes
CO 1: Demonstrate a strong understanding of core engineering principles and possess the
technical skills necessary to design, analyze, and implement engineering solutions across
various disciplines.
CO 2: Apply theoretical knowledge to practical scenarios, effectively solving engineering
problems through hands-on projects, laboratory work, and internships.
CO 3: Exhibit the ability to conduct research, develop innovative solutions, and contribute to
advancements in engineering through critical thinking and creative approaches to complex
challenges.
CO 4:Understand and adhere to professional and ethical standards in engineering practice,
demonstrating responsibility, integrity, and a commitment to sustainable and socially
responsible engineering.
CO 5: Enhance strong communication skills, both written and verbal, and be capable of working
effectively in teams, demonstrating leadership and collaborative abilities in diverse and
multidisciplinary environments.
Important points to consider to select the fellowship project.

Selecting the right fellowship project is crucial for maximizing the educational and professional
benefits of a Diploma in Engineering program.
● Relevance to Future Plans: Choose a project that aligns with your long-term career
aspirations and interests. This alignment will ensure that the skills and knowledge you
gain will be directly applicable to your desired career path.
● Industry Relevance: Consider the current and future relevance of the project within the
industry. Opt for projects that address contemporary challenges or emerging trends in
engineering.
● Access to Facilities: Ensure that the necessary facilities, equipment, and materials are
available to successfully complete the project. Lack of resources can hinder the
progress and quality of your work.

REGULATION 2023
DME 405
1020236353 C
PROJECT 12
● Mentorship and Guidance: Select a project that offers strong mentorship and support
from experienced faculty members or industry professionals. Effective guidance is
crucial for navigating complex problems and achieving project objectives.
● Project Scope: Assess the scope of the project to ensure it is neither too broad nor too
narrow. A well-defined project scope helps in setting clear objectives and achievable
milestones.
● Feasibility: Evaluate the feasibility of completing the project within the given timeframe
and with the available resources. Consider potential challenges and ensure you have a
realistic plan to address them.
● Technical Skills: Choose a project that allows you to develop and enhance important
technical skills relevant to your field of study. Practical experience in using specific tools,
technologies, or methodologies can be highly beneficial.
● Soft Skills: Consider projects that also offer opportunities to develop soft skills such as
teamwork, communication, problem-solving, and project management.
● Innovative Thinking: Select a project that encourages creativity and innovative
problem-solving. Projects that push the boundaries of traditional engineering
approaches can be particularly rewarding.
● Societal Impact: Consider the potential impact of your project on society or the
engineering community. Projects that address significant challenges or contribute to
social good can be highly fulfilling and make a meaningful difference.
Guidelines to select Fellowship

● Ensure the program is accredited by a recognized accrediting body and has a strong
reputation for quality education in engineering.
● Ensure it covers core engineering principles that align with your interests and career
goals.
● Investigate the qualifications and experience of the faculty mentor. Look for programs
with faculty who have strong academic backgrounds, industry experience, and active
involvement in research.

REGULATION 2023
DME 406
1020236353 C
PROJECT 12
● Check if the program provides adequate hands-on training opportunities, such as

laboratory work, workshops, and access to modern engineering facilities and equipment.
● Assess the program’s connections with industry. Strong partnerships with companies
can lead to valuable internship opportunities, industry projects, and exposure to
● Explore the availability of research opportunities. Participation in research projects can
enhance your learning experience and open doors to innovative career paths.
● Look for programs that offer professional development resources, such as workshops,
seminars, and networking events with industry professionals and alumni.
● Ensure the program provides robust support services, including academic advising,
career counseling, mentorship programs, and assistance with job placement after
graduation.
● Consider the cost of the program and available financial aid options, such as
scholarships, grants, and fellowships. Evaluate the return on investment in terms of
career prospects and potential earnings.
● Research the success of the program’s alumni. High employment rates and successful
careers of past graduates can indicate the program’s effectiveness in preparing students
for the engineering field.
Duties Responsibilities of the Faculty Mentor

Each student should have a faculty mentor for the Institute.
● Get the approval from the Chairman Board of Examinations with the recommendations
of the HOD/Principal for the topics.
● Provide comprehensive academic advising to help fellows select appropriate
specializations, and research projects that align with their interests and career goals.
● Guide fellows through their research projects, offering expertise and feedback to ensure
rigorous methodology, innovative approaches, and meaningful contributions to the field.
● Assist fellows in developing technical and professional skills through hands-on projects,

REGULATION 2023
DME 407
1020236353 C
PROJECT 12
● Offer career advice and support, helping fellows explore potential career paths, prepare
for job searches, and connect with industry professionals and opportunities.
● Facilitate connections between fellows and industry professionals, alumni, and other
● Ensure fellows have access to necessary resources, including research materials, lab
● Regularly monitor and evaluate the progress of fellows, providing constructive feedback
and guidance to help them stay on track and achieve their goals.
● Instill and uphold high ethical and professional standards, encouraging fellows to
● Assist with administrative tasks related to the fellowship program, such as preparing
progress reports, writing recommendation letters, and facilitating grant applications.
enhance the learning experience and professional development of fellows.
Instructions to the Fellowship Scholar

● Regularly meet with your faculty mentor for guidance on academic progress, research
projects, and career planning. Be proactive in seeking advice and support from your
mentor.
● Develop strong organizational skills. Use planners, calendars, and task management
tools to keep track of assignments, project deadlines, and study schedules. Prioritize
tasks to manage your time efficiently.
● Take advantage of opportunities to participate in research projects and hands-on
activities. These experiences are crucial for applying your theoretical knowledge and
gaining practical skills.

REGULATION 2023
DME 408
1020236353 C
PROJECT 12

these competencies.
your employability.
additional courses.
Documents to be submitted by the student to offer fellowship.

● Completed Application Form: This is typically the standard form provided by the
institution or fellowship program that includes personal information, educational
background, and other relevant details.
● Detailed CV/Resume: A comprehensive document outlining your educational
background, knowledge experience, interest in research experience, publications,
presentations, awards, and other relevant achievements if any.
● Personal Statement: A document explaining your motivation for applying to the
fellowship, your career goals, how the fellowship aligns with those goals, and what you
intend to achieve through the program.
● Recommendation Letters: Letters from faculty mentor, employer, or professionals who
can attest to your academic abilities, professional skills, and suitability for the
fellowship.

REGULATION 2023
DME 409
1020236353 C
PROJECT 12
● Proposal/Description: A detailed proposal or description of the fellowship project or

study you plan to undertake during the fellowship. This should include objectives,
methodology, expected outcomes, and significance of the project.
● Enrollment Verification: Documentation verifying your current acceptance status in the
academic institution or industry where the fellowship will be conducted.
● Funding Information: Details about any other sources of funding or financial aid you are
receiving, if applicable. Some fellowships may also require a budget proposal for the
intended use of the fellowship funds.
● Samples of Work: Copies of the relevant work that demonstrates your capabilities and
accomplishments in your field.
● Endorsement Letter: A letter from your current academic institution endorsing your
application for the fellowship, if required.
● Ethical Approval Documents: If your research involves human subjects or animals, you
may need to submit proof of ethical approval from the relevant ethics committee.
● Additional Documents: Any other documents requested by the fellowship program
required by the institution.
Every month students have to get their attendance certified by the supervisor in the prescribed
form supplied to them. Students have also to put their signature on the form and submit it to the
faculty mentor. Regularity in attendance and submission of report will be duly considered while
awarding the Internal Assessment mark.

REGULATION 2023
DME 410
1020236353 C
PROJECT 12
Rubrics for Fellowship. Review I & II.
Sl. No. Topics Description
1 Alignment with Assess how well the project aligns with the stated objectives and
Objectives requirements.
Determine if the student has addressed the key aspects outlined in
the project guidelines.
2 Depth of Evaluate the depth and thoroughness of the literature review.

Research: Assess the student's ability to identify and address gaps in existing
research.
3 Clarity of Check if the student has clearly defined and articulated the
Objectives: objectives of the project.
Ensure that the objectives are specific, measurable, achievable,
relevant, and time-bound (SMART).
4 Methodology Evaluate the appropriateness and justification of the research

and Data methodology.
Collection: Assess the methods used for data collection and their relevance to
the research questions.
5 Analysis and Examine the quality of data analysis techniques used.

Interpretation: Assess the student's ability to interpret results and draw meaningful
conclusions.
6 Project Evaluate the project management aspects, including adherence to

Management: timelines and milestones.
Assess the student's ability to plan and execute the project
effectively.

REGULATION 2023
DME 411
1020236353 C
PROJECT 12
7 Documentation Check the quality of documentation, including code, experimental

and Reporting: details, and any other relevant materials.
Evaluate the clarity, structure, and coherence of the final report.
8 Originality and Assess the level of originality and creativity demonstrated in the
Creativity: project.
Determine if the student has brought a unique perspective or
solution to the research problem.
9 Critical Evaluate the student's critical thinking skills in analyzing information

Thinking: and forming conclusions.
Assess the ability to evaluate alternative solutions and make
informed decisions.
10 Problem-Solving Evaluate the student's ability to identify and solve problems

Skills: encountered during the project.
Assess adaptability and resilience in the face of challenges.

REGULATION 2023
DME 412
1020236353 C
PROJECT 12
INTERNAL MARKS - 40 Marks

As per the rubrics each topic should be considered for the Review I and Review II. Equal
weightage should be given for all the topics. It should be assessed by a faculty mentor and the
industrial professional or research guide.
Review 1 shall be conducted after 8th week and Review 2 shall be conducted after 14th week in
the semester. Average marks scored in the reviews shall be considered for the internal
A Assessment as per the rubrics. 30
B Attendance 10
Total 40

REGULATION 2023
DME 413
1020236353 C
PROJECT 12
examiner appointed by the Chairman Board of Examinations after the completion of
fellowship. The marks scored will be converted to 60 marks for the End Semester
Examination.
B Comprehensive report of the Fellowship 30

Work.
C Presentation by the student. 30
D Viva Voce 20
Total 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 414
1020236374 C
In-house Project 540 Periods
PROJECT 12
Introduction
Every student must do one major project in the Final year of their program. Students can do their
major project in Industry or R&D Lab or in-house or a combination of any two for the partial
fulfillment for the award of Diploma in Engineering.
For the project works, the Department will constitute a three-member faculty committee to
monitor the progress of the project and conduct reviews regularly.
If the projects are done in-house, the students must obtain the bonafide certificate for project
work from the Project supervisor and Head of the Department, at the end of the semester.
Students who have not obtained the bonafide certificate are not permitted to appear for the
Project Viva Voce examination.
For the projects carried out in Industry, the students must submit a separate certificate from
Industry apart from the regular bonafide certificate mentioned above. For Industry related
projects there must be one internal faculty advisor / Supervisor from Industry (External), this is
in addition to the regular faculty supervision.
The final examination for project work will be evaluated based on the final report submitted by
the project group of not exceeding four students, and the viva voce by an external examiner.
Objectives
Academic project work plays a crucial role in the education of Diploma in Engineering students,
as it helps them apply theoretical knowledge to practical situations and prepares them for
● Integration of Knowledge: Consolidate and integrate theoretical knowledge acquired in
coursework to solve practical engineering problems.
● Skill Development: Enhance technical skills related to the specific field of engineering
through hands-on experience and application.
● Problem-Solving Abilities: Develop critical thinking and problem-solving abilities by
addressing complex engineering issues within a defined scope.

REGULATION 2023
DME 415
1020236374 C
PROJECT 12
● Project Management: Gain experience in project planning, execution, and management,

including setting objectives, timelines, and resource allocation.
● Teamwork and Collaboration: Foster teamwork and collaboration by working in
multidisciplinary teams to achieve project goals and objectives.
● Research Skills: Acquire research skills by conducting literature reviews, gathering
relevant data, and applying research methodologies to investigate engineering problems.
● Innovation and Creativity: Encourage innovation and creativity in proposing and
developing engineering solutions that may be novel or improve upon existing methods.
● Communication Skills: Improve communication skills, both oral and written, by
presenting project findings, writing technical reports, and effectively conveying ideas to
stakeholders.
● Ethical Considerations: Consider ethical implications related to engineering practices,
including safety, environmental impact, and societal concerns.
● Professional Development: Prepare for future professional roles by demonstrating
professionalism, initiative, and responsibility throughout the project lifecycle.
Course Outcomes
CO 1: Demonstrate the ability to apply theoretical concepts and principles learned in
coursework to solve practical engineering problems encountered during the project.
CO 2: Develop and enhance technical skills specific to the field of engineering relevant to
the project, such as design, analysis, simulation, construction, testing, and
implementation.
CO 3: Apply critical thinking and problem-solving skills to identify, analyze, and propose
solutions to engineering challenges encountered throughout the project lifecycle.
CO 4: Acquire project management skills by effectively planning, organizing, and
executing project tasks within defined timelines and resource constraints.
CO 5: Improve communication skills through the preparation and delivery of project
reports, presentations, and documentation that effectively convey technical information
to stakeholders.

REGULATION 2023
DME 416
1020236374 C
PROJECT 12
Important points to consider to select the In-house project.

● Selecting a project work in Diploma Engineering is a significant decision that can greatly
influence your learning experience and future career prospects.
● Choose a project that aligns with your career aspirations and interests within the field of
engineering. Consider how the project can contribute to your professional development
and future opportunities.
● Ensure the project aligns with your coursework and specialization within the Diploma
program. It should complement and build upon the knowledge and skills you have
acquired in your studies.
● Evaluate the scope of the project to ensure it is manageable within the given timeframe,
resources, and constraints. Avoid projects that are overly ambitious or impractical to
complete effectively.
● Assess the availability of resources needed to conduct the project, such as equipment,
materials, laboratory facilities, and access to relevant software or tools. Lack of
resources can hinder project progress.
● Select a project that genuinely interests and motivates you. A project that captures your
curiosity and passion will keep you engaged and committed throughout the project
duration.
● Consider the availability and expertise of faculty advisors or industry mentors who can
provide guidance and support throughout the project. Effective mentorship is crucial for
success.
● Clearly define the learning objectives and expected outcomes of the project. Ensure that
the project will help you achieve specific learning goals related to technical skills,
problem-solving, and professional development.
● Look for opportunities to propose innovative solutions or explore new methodologies
within your project. Projects that encourage creativity can set you apart and enhance
your learning experience.

REGULATION 2023
DME 417
1020236374 C
PROJECT 12
● Consider ethical implications related to the project, such as safety protocols,

environmental impact, and compliance with ethical guidelines in research and
engineering practices.
● Evaluate whether the project offers opportunities for collaboration with peers, experts
from other disciplines, or industry partners. Interdisciplinary projects can broaden your
perspective and enhance your teamwork skills.
● Consider the potential impact of your project on society or the engineering community.
Projects that address significant challenges or contribute to social good can be highly
fulfilling and make a meaningful difference.
By carefully considering these points, Diploma Engineering students can make informed
decisions when selecting project work that not only enhances their academic learning but also
prepares them for successful careers in engineering.
Duties Responsibilities of the internal faculty advisor.

Each group should have an internal faculty advisor assigned by the HOD/Principal.
● The in-house project should be approved by the project monitoring committee
constituted by the Chairman Board of Examinations.
● The in-house project should be selected in the fifth semester itself. Each in-house project
shall have a maximum of four students in the project group.
● Provide comprehensive academic advising to help in the selection of appropriate
in-house project that align with their interests and career goals.
● Offer expertise and feedback to ensure rigorous methodology, innovative approaches,
and meaningful contributions to the field.
● Assist in developing technical and professional skills through hands-on projects,
● Facilitate connections between students and industry professionals, alumni, and other

REGULATION 2023
DME 418
1020236374 C
PROJECT 12
● Ensure students have access to necessary resources, including research materials, lab
● Regularly monitor and evaluate the progress of the in-house project, providing
constructive feedback and guidance to help them stay on track and achieve their goals.
● Instill and uphold high ethical and professional standards, encouraging students to
● Assist in preparing progress reports, writing recommendation letters, and facilitating
grant applications.
enhance the learning experience and professional development .
Instructions to the students.

● Regularly meet with your internal faculty advisor for guidance on academic progress,
research projects, and career planning. Be proactive in seeking advice and support from
your faculty advisor.
● Use planners, calendars, and task management tools to keep track of assignments,
project deadlines, and study schedules. Prioritize tasks to manage your time efficiently.
● Take advantage of opportunities to participate in in-house projects and hands-on
activities. These experiences are crucial for applying your theoretical knowledge and
gaining practical skills.
these competencies.

REGULATION 2023
DME 419
1020236374 C
PROJECT 12
your employability.
additional courses.
Documents to be submitted by the student for an in-house project.

Submit a printed report of your in-house project work along with the fabrication model / analysis
report for the End Semester Examination.
Rubrics for In-House Project Work
Sl. No. Topics Description
1 Objectives Clearly defined and specific objectives outlined.

Objectives align with the project's scope and purpose.
2 Literature Review Thorough review of relevant literature.

Identification of gaps and justification for the project's
contribution.
3 Research Design and Clear explanation of the research design.

Methodology Appropriateness and justification of chosen research
methods.

REGULATION 2023
DME 420
1020236374 C
PROJECT 12
4 Project Management Adherence to project timeline and milestones.

Effective organization and planning evident in the project
execution.
5 Documentation Comprehensive documentation of project details.

Clarity and completeness in recording methods, results, and
challenges.
6 Presentation Skills Clear and articulate communication of project findings.

Effective use of visuals, if applicable.
7 Analysis and In-depth analysis of data.

Interpretation Clear interpretation of results in the context of research
questions.
8 Problem-Solving Demonstrated ability to identify and address challenges

encountered during the project.
Innovative solutions considered where applicable.
9 Professionalism and Adherence to ethical standards in research.

Compliance Compliance with project guidelines and requirements.
10 Quality of Work Overall quality and contribution of the project to the field.
Demonstrated effort to produce high-quality work.
The mark allocation for Internal and End Semester Viva Voce are as below.
Internal Marks (40 Marks)*
Review 1 Review 2 Review 3

(10 Marks) (15 Marks) (15 marks)
Committee: 5 Marks. Committee: 7.5 Marks Committee: 7.5 Marks

Supervisor: 5 Marks Supervisor: 7.5 Marks Supervisor: 7.5 Marks
Note: * The rubrics should be followed for the evaluation of the internal marks during reviews.

REGULATION 2023
DME 421
1020236374 C
PROJECT 12
The performance of each student in the project group would be evaluated in a viva voce
examination conducted by a committee consisting of an external examiner and the project
supervisor and an internal examiner.
End Semester (100)#
Record Presentation Viva Voce Model / Analysis

(20 Marks) (20 Marks) (20 Marks) Report
(40 Marks)
External: 10 External: 10 External: 10 External: 20

Internal: 5 Internal: 5 Internal: 5 Internal: 10
Supervisor: 5 Supervisor: 5 Supervisor: 5 Supervisor: 10
#
The marks scored will be converted to 60 Marks.

REGULATION 2023
DME 422
2020234274 C
2020237274 Industrial Training (SW) 540 Periods
PROJECT 12
Introduction
The main objective of the sandwich Diploma course is to mould a well-rounded technician
acclimated with the industrial environment while being a student in the institution. The
Sandwich Diploma Course study is pursued by students, in 7 Semesters of 3 ½ years duration,
the subjects of 3 years-Full Time Diploma Course being regrouped for academic convenience.
While in the 4th semester students undergo Industrial Training for 6 months (December through
May). They also do course work in the institution for one day in a week, While in the 7th
semester they undergo another spell of 6 months (June through November) Industrial training.
The Apprenticeship (Amendment) Act 1973 is followed in regulating the Industrial training
procedure for Sandwich Course.
Objectives
The main objective of industrial training for a diploma engineer is to provide practical, hands-on
experience in real-world industrial settings, bridging the gap between academic learning and
professional practice. This training aims to equip students with the skills, knowledge, and
competencies required to effectively perform and succeed in the mechanical engineering
industry.
Key aspects of this objective include:
● Enable students to apply the concepts and principles learned in the classroom to
real-world engineering problems and scenarios.
● Develop essential technical skills.
● Enhance soft skills like communication, teamwork, problem-solving, and time
management.
● Provide exposure to industrial machinery, tools, and equipment, along with the
operational procedures and safety practices in a manufacturing or engineering
environment.
● Offer insights into the daily operations and responsibilities of technicians, preparing
students for the transition from academic settings to professional work environments.

REGULATION 2023
DME 423
2020234274 C
PROJECT 12
● Educate students on industry standards, quality control measures, and best practices in
mechanical engineering and manufacturing processes.
● Help students explore various career paths within mechanical engineering, enabling
them to make informed decisions about their future professional goals.
● Provide opportunities for networking with industry professionals and potential
employers.
● Encourage creative thinking and innovation by challenging students to solve real-world
engineering problems and improve existing processes or products.
● Instill a sense of professionalism, work ethics, and responsibility required in the
engineering field.
Course Outcomes
CO 1: Demonstrate proficiency in using industrial machinery, tools, and software.
CO 2: Able to identify, analyze, and solve engineering problems using industry-standard methods
and practices.
CO 3: Gain a comprehensive understanding of industrial manufacturing processes, quality
control, and safety practices.
CO 4: Exhibit improved communication, teamwork, and professional behavior in an industrial
setting.
CO 5: Apply theoretical concepts learned in their coursework to practical engineering tasks and
projects.
Duties Responsibilities of the Faculty Mentor.

Faculty mentors play a crucial role in overseeing and guiding students during their industrial
training program in Diploma engineering.

REGULATION 2023
DME 424
2020234274 C
PROJECT 12
Pre-Training Responsibilities:
○ Conduct orientation sessions to familiarize students with the objectives,
expectations, and guidelines of the industrial training program.
○ Assist students in understanding the importance of industrial training in their
academic and professional development.
2. Placement Coordination:
○ Collaborate with the placement cell or industry liaison office to secure suitable
training placements for students that align with their academic specialization
and career interests.
○ Facilitate communication between the institution and host organizations to
ensure smooth coordination of training arrangements.
3. Training Plan Development:
○ Help students develop a detailed training plan outlining learning objectives, tasks,
and expected outcomes for the training period.
○ Guide students in setting SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Relevant,
Time-bound) goals for their training experience.
During Training Responsibilities:
4. Monitoring and Support:
○ Regularly monitor the progress of students during their industrial training.
Maintain communication with both students and industry supervisors to track
performance and address any issues that may arise.
○ Provide ongoing support and guidance to students, offering advice on technical
challenges, professional conduct, and workplace etiquette.
5. Technical Guidance:
○ Offer technical guidance and mentorship related to the specific engineering
discipline or specialization of the students. Help them apply theoretical
knowledge to practical situations encountered in the industry.

REGULATION 2023
DME 425
2020234274 C
PROJECT 12
6. Problem-Solving Assistance:
○ Assist students in overcoming obstacles or challenges encountered during their
training. Encourage them to develop problem-solving skills and resilience in
real-world engineering scenarios.
○ Provide constructive feedback on students' performance based on reports,
assessments, and observations gathered from industry supervisors.
○ Evaluate students' achievements in relation to their training objectives and
competencies developed during the program.
Post-Training Responsibilities:
8. Reflection and Debriefing:
○ Conduct debriefing sessions with students to reflect on their training
experiences, discuss lessons learned, and identify areas for further improvement.
○ Help students articulate their learning outcomes and how these experiences
contribute to their professional growth.
9. Documentation and Reporting:
○ Ensure comprehensive documentation of students' training activities,
achievements, and feedback received from industry supervisors.
○ Prepare reports summarizing students' performance and submit these to
relevant departments or committees for review and assessment.
10. Career Counseling:
○ Provide career guidance and counseling to students based on their industrial
training experiences. Assist them in leveraging these experiences for future job
applications or further academic pursuits.
11. Continuous Improvement:
○ Collaborate with industry partners to continuously improve the quality and
relevance of the industrial training program.

REGULATION 2023
DME 426
2020234274 C
PROJECT 12
○ Incorporate feedback from students and industry supervisors to enhance the

effectiveness of future training placements.
By fulfilling these duties and responsibilities, faculty mentors contribute significantly to the
overall educational experience and professional development of Diploma engineering students
during their industrial training program.
Instructions to the students

Here are some instructions for Diploma engineering students undergoing industrial training
during their academic duration:
Before Starting Industrial Training:
○ Attend orientation sessions conducted by the institution or faculty mentors to
understand the objectives, expectations, and guidelines of the industrial training
program.
○ Familiarize yourself with the specific policies, procedures, and safety regulations
of the host organization where you will be undergoing training.
2. Setting Goals:
○ Set clear and specific goals for your industrial training period. Define what skills,
knowledge, and experiences you aim to gain during this time.
○ Discuss your goals with your faculty mentor and seek their guidance in
developing a training plan that aligns with your career aspirations.
3. Professional Attire and Conduct:
○ Dress appropriately and professionally according to the standards of the industry
and host organization.
○ Maintain a positive attitude, demonstrate punctuality, and adhere to workplace
etiquette and norms.

REGULATION 2023
DME 427
2020234274 C
PROJECT 12
During Industrial Training:

4. Learning and Engagement:
○ Actively engage in all assigned tasks and projects. Seek opportunities to learn
new skills and technologies relevant to your field of study.
○ Take initiative in asking questions, seeking clarification, and participating in
discussions with supervisors and colleagues.
5. Adaptability and Flexibility:
○ Adapt to the work environment and demonstrate flexibility in handling various
responsibilities and challenges that arise during your training.
○ Be open to different roles and tasks assigned to you, as this will broaden your
experience and skill set.
6. Professionalism and Communication:
○ Communicate effectively with supervisors, colleagues, and clients as required.
Practice clear and concise verbal and written communication.
○ Demonstrate professionalism in all interactions, respecting confidentiality, and
adhering to company policies and procedures.
7. Safety and Compliance:
○ Prioritize safety at all times. Familiarize yourself with safety protocols,
procedures, and emergency exits in the workplace.
○ Follow all safety guidelines and regulations to ensure your well-being and that of
others around you.
After Completing Industrial Training:

8. Reflection and Documentation:
○ Reflect on your training experience. Evaluate what you have learned, the
challenges you faced, and how you have grown professionally.
○ Maintain a journal or log documenting your daily activities, achievements, and
lessons learned during the training period.

REGULATION 2023
DME 428
2020234274 C
PROJECT 12

○ Seek feedback from your industry supervisor and faculty mentor on your
performance and areas for improvement.
○ Use constructive feedback to enhance your skills and competencies for future
career opportunities.
10. Career Planning:
○ Use your industrial training experience to inform your career planning and
decision-making process.
○ Discuss your career goals and aspirations with your faculty mentor or career
counselor for guidance on next steps after completing your diploma.
By following these instructions, Diploma engineering students can make the most of their
industrial training experience, gain valuable insights into their chosen field, and prepare
themselves effectively for future professional endeavors.
Every month students have to get their attendance certified by the industrial supervisor in the
prescribed form supplied to them. Students have also to put their signature on the form and
submit it to the institution supervisor. Regularity in attendance and submission of report will be
duly considered while awarding the Internal Assessment mark.
Training Reports
The students have to prepare two types of reports: Weekly reports in the form of a diary to be
submitted to the concerned faculty mentor of the institution. This will be reviewed while
awarding Internal assessment. The details of the activity during the training will be monitored by
the Faculty mentor through the faculty advisor and student.
The feedback shall be given to the HOD / Principal for further necessary action.

REGULATION 2023
DME 429
2020234274 C
PROJECT 12

Students are required to maintain the record of day-to-day work done. Such a record is called
Industrial training Diary. Students have to write this report regularly. All days for the week should
be accounted for clearly giving attendance particulars (Presence, absence, Leave, Holidays
etc.). The concern of the Industrial supervisor is to periodically check these progress reports.
Comprehensive Training Report

In addition to the diary, students are required to submit a comprehensive report on training with
details of the organisation where the training was undergone after attestation by the
supervisors. The comprehensive report should incorporate study of plant / product / process /
construction along with intensive in-depth study on any one of the topics such as processes,
methods, tooling, construction and equipment, highlighting aspects of quality, productivity and
system. The comprehensive report should be completed in the last week of Industrial training.
Any data, drawings etc. should be incorporated with the consent of the Organisation.

REGULATION 2023
DME 430
2020234274 C
PROJECT 12
Internal Assessment
Students should be assessed for 40 Marks by industry supervisor and polytechnic faculty
mentor during 3rd Month and 5th Month. The total marks (40 + 40) scored shall be converted to
40 marks for the Internal Assessment.
B Level / proficiency of practical skills acquired. 10

Initiative in learning / working at site
C Self expression / communication skills. 10

D Report and Presentation. 10
Total 40

REGULATION 2023
DME 431
2020234274 C
PROJECT 12
examiner appointed by the Chairman Board of Examinations after the completion of internship
period of six months. The marks scored will be converted to 60 marks for the End Semester
Examination.

department.

Internship.
D Viva Voce 20
Total 100

REGULATION 2023
DME 432

Mech Syllabus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mech Syllabus

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mech Syllabus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1020233110 L T P C

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

CO / PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7

Legend: 3-High Correlation, 2-Medium Correlation, 1-Low Correlation

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

Continuous Assessment (40 marks) End Semester

Duration 2 Periods 2 Periods 1 Hour 3 Hours 3 Hours

Exam Marks 50 50 60 100 100

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

Unit I FOUNDRY TECHNOLOGY

Unit II WELDING TECHNOLOGY

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

Unit III FORGING AND PRESS WORKING

FORGING AND PRESS WORKING 9

Unit IV POWDER METALLURGY AND HEAT TREATMENT

Chapter 4.1: Powder Metallurgy: Methods of manufacturing metal powders – 9

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

Chapter 4.2: Heat Treatment: Purpose – procedures – applications of various heat

UNIT V WORK HOLDING, TOOL HOLDING DEVICES AND POWER TOOLS

Assessment Test and Revision with Student activity 15*

Suggested list of Students Activity,

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

END SEMESTER QUESTION PATTERN - Theory Exam

Duration: 3 Hrs. Max. Marks: 100

Instruction to the Question Setters

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

CO / PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7

Legend: 3-High Correlation, 2-Medium Correlation, 1-Low Correlation

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

Practical documents should be maintained for every exercise / experiment immediately

SCHEME OF EVALUATION - Practical Test

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

Unit I SELECTION OF MATERIALS

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

Unit II DEFORMATION OF METALS

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

Torsion: Theory of torsion - assumptions - torsion equation

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

Revision + Test + Students Activity 10

Suggested List of Students Activity:

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

Text and Reference books:

Equipment / Facilities required to conduct the Practical Portions.

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

END SEMESTER QUESTION PATTERN - Theory Exam

Duration: 3 Hrs. Max. Marks: 100

Instruction to the Question Setters

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

CO / PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7

Legend: 3-High Correlation, 2-Medium Correlation, 1-Low Correlation

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025

Continuous Assessment (40 marks) End Semester

Duration 2 Periods 2 Periods Regularly 3 Hours 3 Hours

Exam Marks 50 50 100 100 100

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, CHENNAI – 600 025